Global Reporting System User Manual GRS-Rig V4.0: Title

Title:
GLOBAL REPORTING SYSTEM

USER MANUAL
GRS-Rig V4.0
Revision Status:
Manual Number: HQS-WTA-MAN-001
Issue Number: 05
Revision Number: 01
Effective Date: 17 th December, 2004
Transocean Inc.
Information Process Solutions
Web & Technical Applications
TABLE OF REVISIONS
Rev. Effective Description of Change Prepared Reviewed

Position Approver
No. Date By By
Issue: 00 November 8, Draft T. Lee GRS Project T. Lee
Rev: 01 2001 Manager F Labesse
A.Sanchez
Issue :01 December 15, Approved T. Lee GRS Project T. Lee
Rev: 01 2001 Manager F Labesse
A.Sanchez
Issue: 02 May 8, 2002 Approved T. Lee GRS Project T. Lee
Rev:02 Manager F Labesse
A.Sanchez
Issue :03 October 31, Updated for v3.0 T.Lee GRS Project T. Lee
Rev :00 2003 Manager F Labesse
A.Sanchez
Issue :04 May 28, 2004 Updated for v3.1 T.Lee GRS Project T. Lee
Rev :01 Manager F Labesse
A.Sanchez
Issue :05 December 17, Updated for v4.0 F.Labesse GRS IT Ibukun Keji
Rev : 01 2004 Project F.Labesse
Manager
A.Sanchez
Issue:
Rev:
Issue:
Rev:
GRS v4.0. User Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GRS Intro................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Ø User Manual Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Ø Important Release Notes: Reminder on good practices ....................................................................................................................................... 8
Ø GRS-Rig: Conceptual Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................. 8
Ø GRS-Rig: About the Program .............................................................................................................................................................................. 9
Ø General Configuration ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Ø Local Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Ø Database Structure ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Ø Users and Accounts .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Ø Reporting .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Ø Starting with GRS-Rig Software ........................................................................................................................................................................ 12
Ø Configuring Your Email Client............................................................................................................................................................................ 13
Ø Installation......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Ø Server Installation ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 14
Ø Client Installation............................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Ø The Installation Folder....................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Ø Starting the Software......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Ø Connecting to the Database .............................................................................................................................................................................. 15
Ø What it looks like ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Ø Creating the Rig(s) ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
Ø Settings Users Accounts ................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Ø Print Reports ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Ø Export Reports via E Mail .................................................................................................................................................................................. 19
Ø Trouble Shooting............................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Ø Compact and Repair ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Ø GRS-Support..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Ø New_Installation_of_v4.0 .................................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Ø Important Release Note: Upgrading to v4.0....................................................................................................................................................... 21
Ø Introduction to GRS-Rig v4.0............................................................................................................................................................................. 22
2. Administration....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Ø Data Exchange: Flow of Information.................................................................................................................................................................. 24
Ø Data Exchange: Send Daily Data (RIG Location)............................................................................................................................................... 25
Ø Data Exchange: Import Base Information (Rig Location) ................................................................................................................................... 27
Ø Data Exchange: Export a Well........................................................................................................................................................................... 27
Ø Data Exchange: Import a Well ........................................................................................................................................................................... 28
Ø Data Exchange: Import Company Data ............................................................................................................................................................. 28
Ø Operational: Close/Revisit a Well ...................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Ø Operational: Customize Units ............................................................................................................................................................................ 29
Ø Operational: Operational Classification.............................................................................................................................................................. 30
Ø Administration: Rig Creation.............................................................................................................................................................................. 30
Ø Administration: Revise Validated Reports.......................................................................................................................................................... 31
Ø Administration: User Accounts........................................................................................................................................................................... 32
Ø Administration: User Accounts: Rig Manager..................................................................................................................................................... 32
Ø Administration: Database Connection................................................................................................................................................................ 33
Ø Administration: Unlock User .............................................................................................................................................................................. 33
Ø Administration: Delete Data :Wells .................................................................................................................................................................... 33
GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

2 161
Ø Administration: Delete Data: Unsent Reports..................................................................................................................................................... 34
Ø Administration: Delete Data: Obsolete Reports.................................................................................................................................................. 35
Ø Administration: Backup Data ............................................................................................................................................................................. 36
Ø Send Data - Configuration Screen ..................................................................................................................................................................... 36
3. Rig Information ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 37
Ø Rig Identification................................................................................................................................................................................................ 37
Ø Multi-Activity...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 38
Ø Tour Configuration............................................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Ø Rooms Database .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 40
Ø Crew Assignment Definition .............................................................................................................................................................................. 42
Ø Rates & Codes .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 43
Ø Equipment Configuration ................................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Ø Mud Pump Definition ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Ø Tubulars Description ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Ø Tubulars Description: Drill Pipe/HW Drill Pipe.................................................................................................................................................... 46
Ø Tubulars Description: Drill Collars...................................................................................................................................................................... 46
Ø Tubulars Description: Riser Joints ..................................................................................................................................................................... 46
Ø Risers................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 46
Ø Risers: Riser Joints: .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 47
Ø Risers: X-Over & Pup Joints .............................................................................................................................................................................. 47
Ø BOP and Joints Measurement........................................................................................................................................................................... 48
Ø BOP and Joints Measurement: BOP 1 .............................................................................................................................................................. 48
Ø BOP and Joints Measurement: BOP 2 .............................................................................................................................................................. 48
Ø BOP and Joints Measurement: Joints / Diverter ................................................................................................................................................ 48
Ø Department Configuration ................................................................................................................................................................................. 49
Ø Crew for IADC ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Ø TRIR-Total Record Incident Rate ...................................................................................................................................................................... 49
4. Personnel Compliance......................................................................................................................................................................................... 50
Ø Personnel Database.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 50
Ø Personnel Data: Company Info.......................................................................................................................................................................... 50
Ø Personnel Data: Personnel Info......................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Ø Well Control Certification ................................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Ø Marine Manning Certification ............................................................................................................................................................................. 52
Ø Compliance ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Ø Manhour Month Report ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Ø Manhour Summary Report ................................................................................................................................................................................ 54
Ø Personnel Reports............................................................................................................................................................................................. 55
Ø Well Control Training Status Report .................................................................................................................................................................. 56
Ø Marine Manning Status Report .......................................................................................................................................................................... 56
5. QHSE ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Ø Incident Report Log ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Ø Incident Report Screen...................................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Ø Incident Report IADC Values............................................................................................................................................................................. 58
Ø Incident Report Processing Flowchart ............................................................................................................................................................... 59
Ø Agreements Log................................................................................................................................................................................................ 59
Ø Agreement Process Screen............................................................................................................................................................................... 60
Ø SQA Log ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 60

3 161
Ø SQA Report Screen........................................................................................................................................................................................... 60
Ø SQA Report....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 61
Ø START Card Report Log ................................................................................................................................................................................... 61
Ø START Card Report Screen .............................................................................................................................................................................. 61
Ø FOCUS Report Log ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 62
Ø FOCUS: General Instructions................................................................................................................................................................................ 62
Ø FOCUS Report Introduction Tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 63
Ø FOCUS: Formulate the Plan Tab....................................................................................................................................................................... 64
Ø FOCUS: Organize Resources Tab .................................................................................................................................................................... 64
Ø FOCUS: Communicate the Plan........................................................................................................................................................................ 65
Ø FOCUS: Undertake the Plan Tab ...................................................................................................................................................................... 66
Ø FOCUS: Summarize Results Tab...................................................................................................................................................................... 67
Ø FOCUS Print Report.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 67
Ø Drill Report Screen Log ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 67
Ø Drill Report Screen ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 67
Ø Drill Report ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 68
Ø HSE Meeting Report Screen Log ...................................................................................................................................................................... 68
Ø HSE Meeting Report Screen ............................................................................................................................................................................. 68
Ø Log of Incidents................................................................................................................................................................................................. 69
Ø Log of Incidents Report ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 69
6. Operational Information ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 70
Ø Tubular Inventory .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 70
Ø Tubular Riser Report ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 71
Ø Tubular Riser Report Log .................................................................................................................................................................................. 71
Ø Tubular Riser Report Screen (Drill Pipe & HWDP)............................................................................................................................................. 71
Ø Tubular Riser Report Screen (Drill Collars and Riser)........................................................................................................................................ 73
Ø Dynamic Positioning Monthly Report Log .......................................................................................................................................................... 74
Ø Dynamic Positioning Monthly Report ................................................................................................................................................................. 74
Ø Dynamic Positioning Event Report Log ............................................................................................................................................................. 74
Ø Dynamic Positioning Event Report .................................................................................................................................................................... 75
Ø Operations Event Report ................................................................................................................................................................................... 76
Ø Operations Event Log........................................................................................................................................................................................ 77
Ø Create New Operational Event Report .............................................................................................................................................................. 77
Ø OER Reporting Procedure................................................................................................................................................................................. 78
Ø Operational Event Report .................................................................................................................................................................................. 79
Ø Rig Manager Review of OER's .......................................................................................................................................................................... 80
Ø Closing of OER's ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 80
Ø OER for Dual or Parallel Activity Operations...................................................................................................................................................... 81
Ø OER Event Examples........................................................................................................................................................................................ 81
Ø Operational Event Report Process .................................................................................................................................................................... 83
Ø Down Time Summary and Rate summary ......................................................................................................................................................... 84
Ø NPT Summary Report ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 84
Ø Rig Rate Report Log.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 84
Ø New Rig Rate Report Screen ............................................................................................................................................................................ 85
Ø Rig Rate Report ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 85
Ø Weekly Drill Report Log..................................................................................................................................................................................... 85
Ø New Weekly Drill Report.................................................................................................................................................................................... 85

4 161
Ø Weekly Drill Report............................................................................................................................................................................................ 86
Ø Running Hours for Tubulars .............................................................................................................................................................................. 86
Ø Products Database............................................................................................................................................................................................ 87
7. Daily Reports ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 88
Ø Daily Reports..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Ø POB Report....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Ø Personnel Arrived.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 88
Ø Personnel Departed .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 89
Ø Personnel On Board.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 89
Ø Hourly Payroll.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 90
Ø POB Summary .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 91
Ø Muster Lists....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 91
Ø Lifeboat Muster List ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 92
Ø Response Team Muster List.............................................................................................................................................................................. 92
Ø Emergency Evacuation Report .......................................................................................................................................................................... 92
Ø Marine Report ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Ø Bulk Section ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Ø Department Activity Report................................................................................................................................................................................ 95
Ø Other Days........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 96
8. New Well .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 97
Ø New Well........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 97
Ø Create New Well ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 97
Ø Sidetrack ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 98
Ø Minimum Well Information ................................................................................................................................................................................. 98
Ø Tight Hole.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 99
Ø Well Information Screen .................................................................................................................................................................................. 100
Ø Well Lithology.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 101
Ø Sections Information........................................................................................................................................................................................ 101
Ø Section............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 102
Ø Casing............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 102
Ø Rig Move Information. ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 102
Ø Rig Move Report ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 103
Ø Riser Running & Pulling Report Log ................................................................................................................................................................ 104
Ø Riser Running & Pulling Report ....................................................................................................................................................................... 105
Ø Riser Running & Pulling Report: BOP & Joints Characteristics ........................................................................................................................ 105
Ø Riser Running & Pulling Report: Creation of the Report................................................................................................................................... 106
Ø Weekly Executive Summary ............................................................................................................................................................................ 107
9. Well Days ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 108
Ø Well Days........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 108
Ø New Day ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 108
Ø Daily Operation Report I .................................................................................................................................................................................. 108
Ø Daily Operation Report II ................................................................................................................................................................................. 110
Ø Mud Report ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 111
Ø IADC ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Ø IADC Page 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Ø IADC Page 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Ø IADC Page 3 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 113

5 161
Ø Daily Executive Summary................................................................................................................................................................................ 114
Ø Weekly Executive Summary ............................................................................................................................................................................ 114
Ø SCR Record.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 115
Ø Last Casing ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 116
Ø Reset Swivel Packing...................................................................................................................................................................................... 116
Ø Operations Breakdown .................................................................................................................................................................................... 117
Ø Main Operations.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 117
Ø Support Operations ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 118
Ø Operational Codes .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 119
Ø Main Codes..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 120
Ø Primary Codes ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 121
Ø Secondary Codes............................................................................................................................................................................................ 123
Ø Operational Codes - Express........................................................................................................................................................................... 126
Ø Operational Codes - Enterprise ....................................................................................................................................................................... 126
Ø Operational Codes - Event Reports ................................................................................................................................................................. 126
Ø Pump Data Record.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 127
Ø Product Inventory ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 127
10. Well Runs ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Ø Well Run ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Ø Bit Record ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Ø Bit Log............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 128
Ø Bit Data Record............................................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Ø Pipe Tally ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 130
Ø Pipe Tally Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................................. 130
Ø Pipe Tally Report............................................................................................................................................................................................. 131
Ø BHA Report..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 133
Ø BHA Log.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 134
11. Data Analysis...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 135
Ø Departmental Activity: Keyword Search........................................................................................................................................................... 135
Ø Department Activity: Search for Policy and Procedure Feedback .................................................................................................................... 136
Ø Departmental Activity Consolidation ................................................................................................................................................................ 136
Ø Performance Tracking ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 137
Ø Performance Tracking: Setup .......................................................................................................................................................................... 137
Ø Performance Tracking: Report......................................................................................................................................................................... 140
Ø Performance Tracking: Tabular Report............................................................................................................................................................ 141
Ø Performance Tracking: Edit Operations ........................................................................................................................................................... 142
Ø Excellence Graph............................................................................................................................................................................................ 143
Ø Agreements Outputs: Table of Agreements..................................................................................................................................................... 143
Ø Agreements Outputs: Agreements Categories................................................................................................................................................. 144
Ø Productive/Non Productive Time ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
Ø START Cards Statistics................................................................................................................................................................................... 145
Ø FOCUS Status ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 145
Ø FOCUS Status: Monthly Analysis of Open Report ........................................................................................................................................... 145
Ø FOCUS Status: Criteria Search ....................................................................................................................................................................... 146
Ø FOCUS Status: FOCUS Configuration Report................................................................................................................................................. 147
Ø Well Reports: End Of Well Report ................................................................................................................................................................... 148
Ø Well Reports: Time / Depth Curve ................................................................................................................................................................... 148

6 161
Ø Well Reports : Well Breakdown ....................................................................................................................................................................... 149
Ø Well Reports: List of Operations ...................................................................................................................................................................... 149
Ø Downtime Criteria Search................................................................................................................................................................................ 149
12. Modify List .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Ø Tubular Inventory Catalogue ........................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Ø Riser Catalogue .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 151
Ø Modify List - Grades ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 151
Ø Modify List - Connection Type ......................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Ø Modify List - Departments................................................................................................................................................................................ 152
Ø Modify List - Identified by/Regulatory Authority List.......................................................................................................................................... 152
Ø Modify List - Products...................................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Ø Modify List - Company..................................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Ø Modify List - Operator...................................................................................................................................................................................... 153
Ø Modify List - Contract Type.............................................................................................................................................................................. 153
Ø Modify List- Type of Work................................................................................................................................................................................ 153
Ø Modify List - County......................................................................................................................................................................................... 153
Ø Modify List - Formation.................................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Ø Modify List - Main/Sub Lithology...................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Ø Modify List - Section Name.............................................................................................................................................................................. 154
Ø Modify List - Tubular Equipment ...................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Ø Casing Catalogue............................................................................................................................................................................................ 156
Ø Modify List - Make ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Ø Modify List - Pins............................................................................................................................................................................................. 156
13. Index................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 157

7 161
1. GRS Intro
Ø User Manual Introduction
Date of Issue: December 2004.
Version 4.0: Introduction to GRS-Rig v4.0
Description: This manual contains a description of the functioning of the GRS-Rig application program. This document has been prepared for
reference by the users on all the rigs involved in the commercial version of the software.
This publication was produced by:

Transocean Inc. – IPS – Web & Technical Applications
User comments are requested and should be sent to:
Transocean Offshore Deepwater Drilling Inc.
4, Greenway Plaza
Houston, TX 77046
E-mail: GRS-Support@houston.deepwater.com
Fax: (1) 713 232 7768
Additional copies of this publication are available from the above address.
CONFIDENTIAL: This manual contains trade secrets and other proprietary information and must not be copied in part or in whole. It must not be
shown to or discussed with anyone outside the Transocean Inc. organization without specific authorization by Transocean Inc. Unauthorized use of
this user manual and the GRS-Rig software is prohibited.
Ø Important Release Notes: Reminder on good practices
GRS-Rig uses MS-Access database as a storage file. By design of the software engine that allows read/write operations to the database, the size of
the file may increase in proportions not related to the amount of data stored in the database.
The more this size increase, the more fragile the database becomes, and this can result in uncontrollable errors and database corruption. In most of
the cases, the database can be recovered by a Repair and Compact operation. But in extreme situation, the database can be unrecoverable, and
data might be lost.
In order to prevent this kind of situation to happen, please carefully read and apply following recommendations :
- Make sure a regular backup of the database, best being on a daily basis, is performed. A new feature has been added to allow it to be done by the
application itself. It can still be setup in the general Rig backup system, or simply manually done, by a simple copy of the file. All instances of GRS-
Rig should be closed at the time of the backup operation. The backup file needs to be renamed, according to the current date and time, allowing
easy identification and avoid erroneous usage by another user.
- To avoid and prevent excessive growth of the database file size, a regular (Weekly) Repair and Compact is also required. GRS-Rig provides
Repair/Compact capabilities :
An internal Repair/Compact function is available from the application. An external Repair and Compact tool is still installed with the
application and a shortcut is automatically created on the computer’s desktop and in the Start menu. The file is named :
"GRS_Rig_RepairCompact.exe".
It simply needs to be copied in the GRS-Rig installation folder. Then, after selection of the database using a standard browser, one click on the
Repair and Compact button will run the process.
Ø GRS-Rig: Conceptual Outline
GRS-Rig, in conjunction with GRS-Online, has been developed on the basis of a Reporting specification created by Transocean operational
personnel. The objective being:
To develop and implement a company operations reporting system, through a rig site single entry process that will meet the information requirements
of all personnel involved in operations line management.

8 161
Specific Requirements for GRS were:
• Single entry system with data entry at rig site
• Complies with all contractual reporting requirements (IADC)
• Simple format requiring minimal input time per module
• Accessible to all parties in the organization
• Minimum daily transmittal time
• Can automatically compile an executive report on a daily basis.
Overall project management was jointly controlled through the TSF IT and Corporate Operations departments.
GRS Rig is delivered on a dedicated CD, which will contain all the necessary files and support applications for it to operate on the following
Transocean IT approved PC systems:
• Microsoft Windows 2000
• Microsoft Windows XP
• Microsoft Office XP Standard Edition
Ø GRS-Rig: About the Program
GRS-Rig is the rig site data collection and analysis tool. GRS-Rig will allow the rig to:
• Produce the day-to-day operational, management & QHSE reports required in the field and onshore.
• Facilitate the analysis of the operational and management data collected from the field.
• Allow the effective management of rig Tubulars (including risers).
• Allow the effective management and tracking of Improvement Opportunities through the FOCUS process.
• Have a reference tool for quick access to previously entered information.
• Allow for the easy transfer of offset well data.
Transfer of the collected data to a dedicated Online Server allows GRS-Online to provide the necessary information in a particular format and time
frame as requested by any authorized user within the Transocean organization. Many reports available to Rig Management on GRS-Rig will be
available to the Transocean community through GRS-Online.
The program will enhance the collection of drilling data and will establish the standard reporting system for all operations data throughout the
Transocean fleet. GRS-Rig defines the operational reporting required by Transocean through which consolidated analysis of operations around the
world will assist in the management of Transocean Minimal Operating Standards.
Since the man in the field has to enter the report data, every effort has been made to simplify the interface between the computer and the user. This
has been achieved by:
• A visually simple and quick navigation facility around the GRS-Rig application.
• Displaying the actual report that is required to be completed.
• Ensuring single entry of information through out GRS-Rig.
• Selection lists are provided at various data entry points.
• Dates are provided through the use of a Calendar.
• The user can enter & exit any report and the program at any time.
• Data validation and checking has been reduced to a minimum.
• The data for any day can be changed at a later date.
The time required by the user, depends a lot on his familiarity with the keyboard and the program. This time will decrease with practice. The time
taken to enter the day-to-day information should be minimal when the rig is equipped with a server and several persons (i.e. the medic for POB
management, the barge supervisor for vessel and weather information …) for collaboration of the Daily Report entry.
A Table of Contents and Index is set up to allow the user to:
1. Quickly find answers to questions about the program.
2. Locate information about different aspects of the program.

9 161
3. Use this document as training for the GRS-Rig program.
Ø General Configuration
GRS is an overall system implemented throughout the company to set common standards for reporting as well as allow "real-time" consolidation and
sharing of the information generated on the field.
Daily Reporting: GRS-Rig application is installed on all operating rigs. Daily reporting and daily data collection at the rig side is completed under the
OIM responsibility. Once validated by the OIM, the information is transferred to OnLine. OER, Incident reports and FOCUS reports are reviewed and
validated by the RM and sent back to the rig from the GRS-OnLine Intranet application
Data Consolidation: Daily data issued from the rigs, are centralized on a server and accessible to recorded Transocean personnel on an Intranet
application, GRS-OnLine.
With the exception of OER, Incident reports and FOCUS reports, the unique direction for data flow is set from the rig direct to GRS-OnLine. This is to
guarantee the consistency of the information all the way through and ensure the validity of the data resident on the rig.
Ø Local Configuration
GRS-Rig software has been designed on a Client / Server model. Data can be accessed from any GRS-Rig installation on a local drive or on a
remote disk on a network. Then the database can be installed on a "Server" and shared by several "Client" installations of the application, running on
different computers on each unit.
As an example, each department on a rig can have its own computer running GRS-Rig and thus concur to the data input in its domain on the same
single rig shared database.
Ø Database Structure
This overview of the organization of the data will help in understanding the way the program works as it is directly related to the user interface and
the way the different reports and areas are accessed by users.
There are 5 main levels of correlated information, each level potentially using data from the upper stage :
1. Rig: All general information regarding the Rig. Administrative information like the name or cost center but also description of the main
equipments, BOPs and Joints, rooms database, type of tubulars in use …
This information is entered once and rarely modified but is used throughout the application in the different reports.
2. Rig Reports: A number of reports related to Rig information can be generated. It includes QHSE reports as well as operations related reports.
The access to these reports is made through 4 main menu items in the application, depending on domain of interest and predefined schedule of
reporting
• Personnel and Compliance
• QHSE
• Operational Information
• Daily Reports
3. Wells: Each well operated by the rig appears in the menu view under its name. It gives access to Well Information and general Well related
reports (Rig Move, Riser Running…) not needed on a daily basis.
4. Daily Wells Reports: This area is directly related to the daily operational information generated every morning and includes Daily Operations
Report, Mud Report, Daily Executive Summary and IADC Report.
5. Runs Data: Finally information related to the Runs, that can overlap on several Well days appears at the very bottom of the Well "Menu". It
includes Bit Record, BHA and Pipe Tally Reports.
Ø Users and Accounts
Complementing the Client/Server and concurrent access capability, a definition of users profiles has been implemented in GRS-Rig. These profiles
have different capability and rights/restrictions towards the application. Each potential user of the application will have to be granted a user account
with a given profile that will define his access rights to the application and thus the data he will be able to deal with.

10 161
When an authorized user has opened a given report in edition mode, this report can not be opened with the same edition rights by another
user. It will be displayed in read-only mode until the report is closed.
Thus it is good practice to at least save and close an opened report, and if possible even log out of the application if you intend to leave it
for a while.
The Administrator Profile: (Rig Admin or Base Admin)

This role is extremely important as it is granted access to some specific administrative functionality.
It should be reserved to a restricted number of persons, ideally IT Supervisor if present on Rig or IT – MIC.
The default and only user predefined in the Application belongs to this group and will be in charge of the initial configuration of the database. The
administrator can access and display all the reports in GRS-Rig but has no data input rights.
The list of GRS-Rig users and related profiles, setting their domains of input, should be defined according to the rig organization prior to starting
using the software.
The definition of the different profiles available in GRS-Rig with a summary of their access rights will help you in building this organization:
Rig Installation
Guest: Can input some QHSE reports, limited to START Cards, FOCUS Proposals and CIP
Reader: Above plus: Can display all data in the application, Print any report and access Data Analysis area.
Safety: Above plus: Can input in Departmental Activity Report, Incident Report, Safety Drill and SQA.
Medic: Above plus: Can input in Personnel Database, POB Report and Personnel Certification Information
Drilling: Above plus: Can input in all GRS-Rig reports, Rig Configuration, create a new Well, customize the units system and the classification of
Operations
Marine: Same as Drilling
Technical: Same as Drilling
Offshore Management: Same as Drilling plus : Access all "Administrative" functionalities of the application : create, delete users accounts, validate
the data (daily data, low priority FOCUS Proposals) and send daily information to the Rig Manager, re-edit validated reports, upload information sent
back by the rig manager. In summary and due to his responsibility, the Offshore Management user is granted access to all GRS-Rig functions. He is
responsible for the data issued from the Rig and sent to the Rig Manager.
Every user from any of the above profiles needs to be assigned a rig and the access rights described above apply and only to this rig.
Rig Admin : display of all GRS-Rig reports and screens, initial Rig creation and users accounts management.
Ø Reporting
GRS is designed to allow the efficient use of time for all users on a Drilling Unit. It is up to the management on the unit to ensure that the facilities
offered by GRS are correctly utilized and that the quality of the input is to an acceptable standard. By ensuring that the reporting load is distributed
correctly amongst the unit personnel, reporting time will be reduced and the quality of the input will be greater as individuals will have the time to
‘think things through’ before recording the information. Job descriptions vary from unit to unit however the following is a suggestion for how the
reporting workload could be divided amongst the unit personnel.
• Personnel Database: Radio Op, Medic
• Compliance Reporting: RSTC, Medic
• QHSE Incident Reporting: OIM, Department Heads, Medic
• SQA Reporting: OIM
• START Card: RSTC
• FOCUS Reporting: OIM, Department Heads
• Safety Drill Reports: Marine Dept
• Tubular Inventory: Toolpusher, Drilling Dept
• Event Reports: Toolpusher
• POB Reports: Radio Op, Medic
• Marine Reports: Marine Dept

11 161
• Departmental Activity Reports: Departmental Heads, Drilling Dept, Warehouse

• Well Information: Toolpusher at start of a well.
• Riser Running & Pulling Report: Toolpusher, Subsea Dept
• Daily Operations Report I
Operations Breakdown: Drillers/AD’s, Toolpushers
• Daily Operations Report II
Run Parameters: Drillers/AD
BHA Details: Drillers/AD’s
• Mud Report: Engineer
• Daily Executive Report: OIM
• Bit Record: Drillers/AD’s, Toolpusher
• Pipe Tally Report: Toolpusher
• BHA Report: Drillers/AD’s, Toolpusher
Ø Starting with GRS-Rig Software
Requirements: GRS-Rig is designed to run on the minimum configuration as follows:

• Windows 2000 or XP
• PC Pentium II 333 Mhz
• 128 MB of RAM
• 200 MB Hard Disk free space
• 1024*768 screen resolution
Microsoft Internet Explorer v 5.0 or greater and Microsoft Office XP Standard Edition are required.
Data sending capability requires Eudora v4.3 or MS Outlook 2000/2002 to be present.
If not already present on your computer, please note that they are provided on the GRS-Rig CD-ROM.

12 161
Ø Configuring Your Email Client
Automatic data exchange by email attachment in GRS-Rig uses the MAPI (Messaging Application Program Interface) component. It requires an
email client to be installed and properly configured on the OIM (or Rig Manager) computer. GRS-Rig supports Outlook 98 and Eudora 4.3 email client
programs.
Eudora 4.3:
MAPI Configuration
- From Eudora "Tools" menu, select the bottom "Options…" item.
- Select the "MAPI" category and set the "Use Eudora MAPI server" option to "Always"
Internet Options settings

- From the "Start" menu, "Settings" option, open the "Control Panel"
- Double click the "Internet Options" icon and select the "Programs" tab
- In the "Internet Programs", select Eudora for the "E-mail" option
- Verify that Microsoft Outlook is not selected in the "Newsgroup" list. If necessary, modify this selection to Outlook Express by example.
Note: Microsoft Outlook will no longer be able to work properly with this MAPI configuration. However it is still possible to step backward by resetting
in Eudora the "Use Eudora MAPI server" option to "Never".
Outlook 98:
MAPI Configuration
Unless Eudora is installed on the same computer and configured to "Always" use Eudora MAPI server (see above), MAPI components are
already present and configured in the Operating System.
Internet Options settings
- From the "Start" menu, "Settings" option, open the "Control Panel"
- Double click the "Internet Options" icon and select the "Programs" tab
- In the "Internet Programs", select Microsoft Outlook for the "E-mail" option
- Verify that Microsoft Outlook is selected in the "Newsgroup" list.
Ø Installation
The installation of the GRS-Rig program requires sufficient privileges to install and correctly set up the computer. Make sure you are logged on using
an administrator account or the installation will fail.
Always let the system reboot after installation of GRS-Rig. Otherwise, some system information will not be taken into account and the program may
then not work properly.
GRS-Rig link to the database requires Microsoft Data Access Component (MDAC) version 2.5 or greater to be installed on the computer. The GRS-
Rig installation program will automatically detect this component and install it, prior to installing the application, if it could not be found. This is
mandatory to have GRS-Rig working properly. Do not cancel or interrupt the installation of the MDAC components when launched by the Set-up
program. (See Trouble Shooting later in this document)
This version of GRS-Rig is delivered with an Access XP database. As already mentioned, future versions of the application may later address other
database systems. The information provided in this document only accounts for the current Access configuration.
Note: If you have chosen to run a Client / Server configuration, with a Database shared on a server, please first install the server side application.
If GRS-Rig is intended to run on a single computer on the location, a unique "Server" installation is required on this computer.

13 161
Ø Server Installation
Run the GRS-Rig Setup program from the CD-ROM.

Select the installation folder. It is recommended to keep the folder name provided by default by the Setup program. If because of disk space available
the application needs to be installed on a different drive, please try to only modify the drive letter and keep the directory name unchanged.
Select the Mono Rig Server option. This will install both the application and the database.
Important: In a shared database configuration, the server database folder (see Installation folder below) must be accessible (shared) on the network
from the different computers where GRS-Rig client applications are intended to be installed. GRS-Rig users also need to have write access to this
folder.
Ø Client Installation
Run the GRS-Rig Setup program from the CD-ROM.

Select the installation folder. It is recommended to keep the folder name provided by default by the Setup program. If because of disk space available
the application needs to be installed on a different drive, please try to only modify the drive letter and keep the directory name unchanged.
Select the GRS-Rig Client option to install only the GRS-Rig application.
Ø The Installation Folder
The following files and folders should never be manually deleted from the disk or moved to another directory or the application will no longer run
properly.
• Application files (Executable, Help file, Initialization file…) are located directly in the installation folder.
• GRS-Rig installation creates a set of sub-folders used by the application :
• "Pictures"
• "Bin"
• "Database" (for a Server installation only)
An other folder will be created at run time for the purpose of data validation and exchange by email attachment :
• "Data Send"
You should not create or copy any file in this folder. They might be automatically deleted when validating and exporting the daily data. This folder is
reserved for GRS-Rig application.
When exporting and saving daily data into files(not automatic email attachment), an "Exported Data" directory will be created and proposed as a
default target folder. This is a user directory that the application will let you use as your saved files repository.
Note: You can create additional folders for your own use but making sure to avoid any change in the application reserved directories.
Shortcuts: Shortcuts for GRS-Rig application are created both in:

- "Start" menu, "Programs", "GRS-Rig" option
- On your computer Desktop

14 161
Ø Starting the Software

GRS-Rig is installed with one single default Administrator user account set as follows :
• Username : admin
• Password : admin
The IT in charge should use this account to set the connection to the database on the server and create the initial configuration.
• Connect to the database
• Create the rig (s)
• Create the user accounts
It is recommended to change the password for the "admin" user after this initial connection and to restrict disclosure of the new password. Privileges
granted to this user’s profile, if not properly used, can cause important damages to the database.
Ø Connecting to the Database
IMPORTANT: As the Connection Information is stored in the Operating system itself, it is again required for the user to be logged on the
computer as an administrator of the computer.
Reminder: The information provided in this document only accounts for the current Access configuration.
When first launched, the application will ask the user to locate the database file on the computer or on the network.

15 161
On a server installation:
The database file is located in the "Database" sub folder under the installation directory. Browse to select the file or enter the complete path to the
MDB file.
Once the database is located, click OK. The GRS-Rig login screen will be displayed.
When intended to work on a networked configuration with a shared database, it is recommended to initialize database information on the server
before configuring the database connection on the different clients. Go to "Creating the Rig" and "Settings users accounts" paragraphs before coming
back to this point.
If GRS-Rig is supposed to run only on a single computer, simply skip the following and refer to "Creating the Rig".
On a client installation:
Client application should not be launched until the administrator have set and configured the server, i.e. rig(s) and users accounts have been
created.
The database file will be accessed through the network on the Server.
- From the Windows Explorer, you can specify and assign a Drive letter to the remote directory. Use the "Map Network Drive" option in the Windows
Explorer and specify "Reconnect at logon".
Then Browse to this "mapped" disk and select the database file
- Or you can directly Browse to the Server computer without "mapping" the Drive to a letter. Through the Network Neighbourhood, select the server
name and the Shared directory to locate the Database file.
Once the database is located, click "Connect". The database connection parameters will be recorded in the Operating System.
The GRS-Rig login screen is displayed.

16 161
Ø What it looks like

You can now log in using the default administrator account.
GRS-Rig application screen is divided in 2 parts.
On the left side, the GRS-Tree. On the right side, the Reporting area.
The GRS-Tree is a representation of the data and reports available in the application. It acts as a graphical menu to access the different screens and
reports. Items are organized on the model of the Database Structure declared earlier in this document.

17 161
The right part of the application screen is used to display the reports. On small resolution screens, it is possible to enlarge the report display area by
hiding the GRS-Tree. Click on the left button in the application Toolbar, or select the "Hide GRS-Tree" option in the "View" menu. Click the same
button or select "Show GRS-Tree" option to restore the display of the GRS-Tree.
Most of the input screens that are not "Reports" (Rig description screens, Log screens, Messages…) will be displayed over the application window.
The Application Toolbar provides a set of 6 buttons with the following functions :
- Hide / Show the GRS-Tree
- Log out current user
- Save currently opened Report
- Cancel changes made on currently opened Report
- Print current Report. Current report is sent to the default Printer
- Preview current Report. Current report is displayed in its Printable format in a Preview window.
Ø Creating the Rig(s)

Refer to: Administration: Rig Creation
Log in using the default administrator account.

The first mandatory step to start using GRS-Rig is the declaration of the Rig in the database.
In the GRS-Tree, select the Rig Creation item in the Administration Tab.
From the list of TSF rigs displayed in the left part of the screen, select the Rig you’re working on by double-clicking its name or highlight it and click
on the left-to-right arrow.
Once selected, click on OK to save and close this screen.
On a base installation, this operation can be repeated to declare the different Rigs managed by Rig Managers sharing a unique Database.
Ø Settings Users Accounts
The list of GRS-Rig users and related profiles, setting their domains of input, should be defined according to the rig organization prior to starting
using the software.
Depending on each Rig size and organization, different options can be used in this domain.
- Each individual person can be granted his own account.
- Small groups of persons can share a generic account. By example, Day and Night Toolpushers and their relief team could share a single account
as they will not work at the same time but will definitely work on the same areas of input. Generic accounts could also be based on membership
of the same department on the rig.
With the exception of Administrator accounts (see reason in Trouble Shooting), a given user (username and password) can only log once
in to the application.
When an authorized user has opened a given report in edition mode, this report can not be opened with the same edition rights by another
user. It will be displayed in read-only mode until the report is closed.
Thus it is good practice to at least save and close an opened report, and if possible even log out of the application if you intend to leave it
for a while.
2 Users among the GRS-Rig users profiles need to be limited and carefully assigned.
-As already explained earlier in this document, Administrator accounts should be assigned to IT in charge.
-Offshore Management users have access to all GRS-Rig functions. As the OIM is responsible for all the data issued and sent from the rig, he can
create, amend and validate (send) all the reports generated with the application. He also can access all the Administrative functions and thus, all
combined, can modify any single information in the database.

18 161
Same apply to the Rig Manager related to the responsibility of sending the Rig data to the GRS-OnLine application.
All the above is given as information and advice. At the end of the day, the selection of the users accounts organization and the distribution of input
responsibility in the different domains of input remains with the rig management (OIM).
Access rights to the various functions in GRS is defined in Users and Accounts.
Ø Print Reports
The majority of reports in GRS can be ‘Print Previewed’ or hardcopy printed via a printer device. GRS utilizes embedded software Crystal Reports to
generate a report from the information presented on the ‘Screen View’. All reports have standard Headers and Footers while the title and content
changes from report to report.
Print Preview: Click on the icon in the toolbar, or select ‘Print Preview’ from the File Menu. A preview for the report will be displayed on the screen
in a Crystal Report controlled area. You can Maximise or Minimise the Crystal report window as per normal.
Note: Once in a Crystal Report controlled area, the focus within GRS remains with the Report until it is closed. You cannot minimise the report
preview window and return to GRS screen. To return to GRS, the Crystal report window must be closed.
Print: Click on the Printer icon in the toolbar, or select ‘Print’ from the File Menu. The print screen will appear to confirm print range and copies
required. Click OK to print the report.
Print Daily Report: This function will automatically print out the following standard Daily Reports:
• DOR I
• DOR II
• Mud Report
• Marine Report
• Departmental Activity Report
• POB Report
From the File Menu select ‘Print Daily Reports’ and the selection screen will appear:
Select the desired report by checking the corresponding check boxes.
Print: Select Rig, well name and days from the available drop down selection and click ‘Print’. GRS will print all reports to the printer selected.
Export: Export Reports via E Mail.
Cancel: Exit screen without any further action taken.
Ø Export Reports via E Mail
The majority of reports in GRS that can be ‘Print Previewed’ or hardcopy printed via a printer device utilizing the embedded software of Crystal
Reports can also create a file (or digital) version of the report. This digital version can then be sent onwards as an E Mail attachment.
Open the report via `Print Preview'. Go to the File Menu in Crystal Report and click on the envelope icon in the toolbar. A selection screen will
appear:
Format: From the Drop down menu, select either PDF or Excel (xls).
Destination: Disk file is the only option available.
Print Daily Report: This function can automatically export a digital file of the following standard Daily Reports:
• DOR I
• DOR II
• Mud Report
• Marine Report
• POB Report
From the File Menu select ‘Print Daily Reports’ and the selection screen will appear:

19 161
Select the desired report by checking the corresponding check boxes.
Export: Select Rig, well name and days from the available drop down selection and click ‘Export’. GRS will prepare Export all reports. ‘Export Daily
Report – Configuration’ screen will appear. Complete this screen to either send the digital file by E Mail or to disk. Exported file will be in HTML
format and zipped to minimize the file size.
Ø Trouble Shooting
Best practice to avoid trouble shooting is to follow some of the basic recommendations shown below regarding regular basis backup. A User Manual
is provided with the application and reading it will give you a lot of detailed information on how to use the software.
Backup recommendations
The only file to be backup with GRS-Rig is the .mdb file located in your GRS-Rig database folder. It is critical that this file is backup on a regular
basis and added to the rig server backup list when available. Make sure that you always keep only one .mdb file in this directory.
The GRS-Rig DB file backup needs to be performed as regularly as possible, daily if possible, while ALL users are disconnected from the system
and ALL GRS-Rig clients are CLOSED (NO GRS-Rig running) or your backup may be not be reusable at all. The recover is fairly simple, as you just
need to replace the .mdb file in the GRS-Rig Database folder by the archived file.
If you have a backup software automatically scheduled and depending on the software used you may schedule this at a time where you instructed all
your users to have the GRS-Rig application closed. If you backup software allows it, you should launch the scheduled backup only if the <GRS-
RigDB>.ldb file is not present in the Database folder. It indicates that no user is connected to the .mdb file and the backup will be safe.
Tell your users to check their backup system logs daily to make sure that it was fully performed.
Should you have no backup system on site. Tell users to perform regular copies of the .mdb file. Again the copy absolutely needs to be done while
no GRS-Rig client is running. When done, rename the .mdb file as .bakMMDDYY to make it visible it is a backup and to save the date of this copy.
And CHANGE the files properties to Read Only. This will prevent any GRS-Rig client to reconnect to this file. This rule applies to any copy of the DB.
At any time only one .mdb file must be accessible by a GRS-Rig client : the current database.
This may save users and support time and headaches.
Check your users backup as regularly as possible and if possible, archive them on floppies/tapes adequately labelled (WITH DATE of backup) in the
OIM office or off site when relevant.
Contextual Help
In general, practice of software improves users efficiency and easiness of use with the time. In order to facilitate this improvement, GRS-Rig is
delivered with a Help File that can be easily accessed from anywhere in the application. Hitting the F1 Key or selecting the "Help" item in the
application "Help" menu will display information displayed related to the way to use the currently opened screen or report.
Following these instructions will help you making a good use of the software and its capabilities. Do not hesitate to refer to this tool as soon as you
are wondering on how to do this or that.
Users disconnection
After a crash or a power-off might occur on a server or a client, currently connected users will internally remain recorded as "Connected" to the
database. The application now allows the same user to reconnect from the same computer. There is, in this case no longer a need to be able to
"Disconnect" him from the database. However this capability is still provided to Administrator and Offshore Management (Rig Management) users
profiles in the "Users Disconnection" option in the "Administration" menu (Administration Tab in GRS-Tree).
First select the relevant Rig(s) the user to disconnect are assigned to, then select the user(s) and click the "Disconnect" button. Selected users are
now able to log in again and continue to work on GRS-Rig.
Ø Compact and Repair
The same kind of problem occurring on the computer where the database is installed (Server) can sometimes also corrupt the database.
The size of an Access Database generally increases quicker than the growing amount of information it contains. This needs to be checked from time
to time by the Administrator and when the size has significantly increased, a Repair and Compact of the database should be used to reduce the size
of the file.
An internal Compact and Repair function is provided with GRS-Rig, Administration menu..

20 161
This capability must be used only after making sure that every user of the application has logged out of the application. However a check is made by
the software for any connected user as well as for sufficient disk space available before proceeding to the Compact or Repair of the database. But
passing the message on to all users before trying to carry out one of these functions might save your time and energy !!!
It should be used only by an administrator and after checking that all and every user has disconnected and closed GRS-Rig application.
It is recommended to Compact the Database after the Creation of Rig(s) in the Database
Ø GRS-Support
In case of any problem, question, suggestion, do not hesitate to contact the GRS Support team at the following Email address:
GRS-Support@Houston.deepwater.com
Ø New_Installation_of_v4.0
- A Server installation (Client + Database) of the GRS-Rig application needs to be made on a server, and the Database folder then shared to be
accessed by the other Rig computers as required.
- Do a ‘Client only’ installation on these other computers and setup a Map Drive to the Database folder. When launching the application, users will be
requested for the path to the database to setup the connection to access the data.
- Please read the User Manual and extensively use the F1 key to access the help file from the application.
Ø Important Release Note: Upgrading to v4.0
GRS-Rig v4.0 introduces a few changes to the database structure. Thus, the existing database used on the Rig requires an upgrade that will be
automatically performed the first time the v4.0 application will start on any computer on your rig.
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU FOLLOW THE STEPS INDICATED BELOW
AFTER HAVING SENT THE NEXT DAILY DATA FILE:

1- Ensure a backup copy of the GRS-Rig v3.1 Database is made and kept onboard before upgrade to v4.0 is commenced. It is usually named
GRSRigMono.mdb and located under the Database folder in GRS-Rig installation directory on the server.
2- Ensure ALL GRS-Rig applications are closed on the rig.
3- Upgrade one computer to GRS-Rig v4.0 by launching the setup.exe contained in the installation files package and launch the application to
complete the database conversion. Verify the normal behavior of GRS-Rig v4.0
4- Send an email to GRS-Support to confirm the conversion has been achieved on the Rig. GRS-Support group needs to upgrade GRS-OnLine
accordingly (or your following GRS data file will be rejected).
5- Only once the first computer has been checked and is running fine, complete the installation on the other computers, including the server hosting
the database, if it already hosts an installation of the application.
Because of the changes in the database structure, any previous version of GRS-Rig, including v3.1 will not be able to access the v4.0 (converted)
database.
Reminder: Any of your rig crew or supervisors can get a GRS-OnLine account to check reports from the other same class rigs OnLine.
This will allow all who need it to review any report sent to GRS-OnLine by the other same class rigs: DORs, OERs, DAR, QHSE and Performance
reports as well as search and consolidate on all rigs of that rig class. In a short time (actually in testing) any GRS-OnLine user will be able to
subscribe to specific rig reports for a set of rigs and get automatically notified by email once the selected reports are received OnLine from the
selected rigs.
We just require the individual to have a 'named' (with his name and not his position) LDAP Directory record as well as the GRS-OnLine Account
Request form filled in and email approved by OIM or RM (no need to PDF or scan).
Contact GRS-Support is any question.

21 161
Ø Introduction to GRS-Rig v4.0
GRS-Rig version 4.0 introduces improvements, corrections and redesigned features as listed below:.
Module Description
Administration Import/Export Well
The Export Well functionality has been removed from the GRS-Rig features.
It is still possible to Import a Well that can now be exported upon request from GRS-
OnLine application
Other Days (Daily and Well Reports)
Access to previous days reports has been made easier by the addition of a Previous
and a Next link to the treeview.
This will allow to change the 10 days period directly accessible from the tree.
Corrected a bug that could prevent deletion of an unsent OER
A Well can be deleted if it does not contain any Operation
Rig Move Report0 An Actual Time information field has been added to the following Actual Date fields:
Move Date
On Location
Spud Date
Input of these information is required
Bit Rotating Hours The calculation has been modified to account only for specific operations:
Where OP_SECONDARY = Making hole Or OP_PRIMARY = Coring
Rotating Hours for other equipments are unchanged and related to the Rotating Flag
in the Classification of Operations
Bit/BHA The bit declared in the BHA is now tight to the Bit Record, sharing same
parameters(S/N, Diameter…)
DOR I Correction: Run Time error when resetting the Swivel Packing Hours
Drill Report A Drill Time field has been added to the report
This allows the Drill to be automatically reported in the IADC report in the correct
Tour comment field.
OER A new OER type has been added: HPR (Hole Problem)
This OER is not Equipment Related.
Correct the display of FOCUS Action report #
Correct a run time error when opening an OER including a Picture
NPT Summary The NPT Summary has been modified to account for the new HPR OER Type
* All Equipment Related DT is reported via an EFR or an MEF. The total DT is
reported under "Total Mechanical"
* Procedural failure is reported only via PEF
* The sum of the 2 above is referred as Total Transocean Downtime
* Other DT is reported via an OET
* Planned NPT does not require an OER. It is reported via the operation coding,
using "Preventative Maintenance" as a primary activity
* The sum of the above is referred to as Total Transocean NPT
* WOW is reported using the "Wait"/"Weather" operation coding, with or without an
OER attached
* WOW Included exclude "Wait"/"Weather" operations referencing an OER
* Wait on Client NPT is reported only using OEC type of OER
* Hole Problems is reported only using HPR type of OER
Bulks/Mud Products Corrected a bug preventing to save Bulks input from the Mud Report
Mud Report Conversion of SCR Mud Weight corrected
FOCUS Corrected bug on Extension date submission that generated an error if the Target
Completion date was missing
Check for unsubmitted updates prior to Closing a FOCUS report
Corrected unexpected changes of FOCUS report Status value
Hourly Payroll Timekeeper and Reviewer field made mandatory
Avoid showing a user in timesheet if he would only show on the departing day and
with 0 working hours
Handle crew change of a crew member during the reporting period
IADC Safety Drills are now reported in the Tour Comments section of the report
Correct the Tour/Rotary assignment reporting for Enterprise Class Rigs
Display the Wireline record to the correct tour.
Changed the Days since Last Lost Time incident calculation: Only account for SIC
and Fatalities
Marine Manning/ Account for Active/Inactive flag in Personnel DB
Well Control
Marine Report Allow text input in the Legs name fields

22 161
Incident Correction: Latitude and Longitude values were cumulating several iteration of the
Direction information (N,S,W or E)
Revisit Well This feature is now accessible from the same link as the Close Well feature. It is
much more visible to users.
Operations Reporting Creation of a sidetrack:
- Corrected a bug that could prevented the first DOR to be created on the same day
as the last DOR of the parent Well
- The section # for the new well can start from any value from 0 to the last section #
used in the Parent Well
- The Run # will restart at 1
Support Operations for Standard Rig
The selection of the activity Location has been removed as it is necessarily assigned
to the unique Support location defined in the Multi-Activity screen
For enterprise Rigs, a verification is done prior to sending the Data File that there is
no double reporting of overlapping NPT information
(ex of 2 OER assigned to 2 different wells for the same time period)
After revision of a DOR, only the operations for the selected day can be edited. The
next morning operations should be edited in the next day DOR I
Personnel Config Space for Home Phone has been increased to allow display of the whole input text
Report
Personnel DB A Crew can not be deleted if it is currently used in HSE Meeting or Hourly Payroll
reports
Added Cypriot Nationality to the selection list.
Personnel Reports The POB Summary per Category in the POB has been improved and an indication of
the Transocean Working Hours for the day has been added.
In the POB and Arrival/Departure reports, the definition of the Escape means has
been added to the number
A Total POB figure has been added to the Arrival/Departure Summary
Personnel configuration Reports now account for Active/Inactive personnels
User with a “Radio” user profile can now invalidate the current POB report with a
button in the screen to amend the working hours.
When creating a new POB Report, Working Hours are now retrieved from the
Personnel Database instead of from the Previous POB Report.
Riser Bug correction: Run time error when trying to create a riser but no Riser had actually
been defined in the Tubulars Description screen.
Tub. Riser Report Corrected some rounding errors on diameter values that were preventing correct
carry over of the previous report’s count.
Time/Depth curve This report has been completely rewritten with a new version of the GRS reporting
tool.
User can now select the Depth unit (ft or Meters)
Revise Report Reports available for Revision are now listed sorted by Date
Rig Rate Report Correction: When one single rate had been added to the default list of 4, the hours
were not showing for this rate
SQA The SQA report Date can now be modified if it had been initially set by error
The SQA report also allows the OIM to delay sending of the report with a "Ready to
Send" check box
START Observation Addition of BOP Transport and Gear Locker to the list of Locations
Addition of Wire Lining to the list of Operations
DP Event Report The Generator field now allow for the additional selection of "O" for On Line

23 161
2. Administration
Ø Data Exchange: Flow of Information
Since Version 3.0 the Rig Manager approves Operational Event, Incident and Focus reports using GRS-OnLine. These reports are sent back to the
rig from OnLine by the Rig Manager for import to GRS-Rig. Also at this point the validated reports are now available to other OnLine users who may
not have the necessary permissions to view unapproved reports.
This process allowed to provide a more effective and efficient means of transferring data files between the Rig and the Rig Manager. The Rig
Manager still carries out the same functions on GRS-OnLine. Reports are reviewed by the Manager; where appropriate the Manager adds comments
to reports and validates other important documents. Other GRS-OnLine users will see what information was detailed before. Most users will only see
validated reports after the Rig Manager has approved them. Diagram of the flow process is shown below:
Step One: Rig completes the input of daily information into the GRS-Rig system. Through one E Mail action, the rig sends GRS Data to the OnLine
server which then uploads the file. Data Exchange: Send Daily Data (RIG Location)
• OnLine Server: Receives, uploads and immediately displays all daily reports such as DOR I & II, DAR, Marine Report, POB information etc.
Operational Event, Incident, Focus and HSE Meeting reports that have not been validated by the Rig Manager will NOT be immediately
displayed to other OnLine users.
• Rig Manager: Will receive a notification e-mail announcing that the Rig has sent in a daily report such as DOR I & II, DAR, Marine Report, POB
information etc plus Operational Event, Incident and Focus reports. This e-mail will advise the manager of what reports the OnLine server has
received from the Rig. The Manager can now logon to OnLine and review and approve reports.
Step Two: Rig Manager reviews any Operational Event, Incident ,Focus and HSE meeting reports sent by the rig. After review if the report approved
and sent back to the rig for import.
The OIM will receive a file from GRS-OnLine and load it back into the rigs GRS database. Data Exchange: Import Base Information (Rig Location)

24 161
Ø Data Exchange: Send Daily Data (RIG Location)
This function sends to OnLine the daily information that has been entered into the GRS system at the rig site. Data sent to OnLine will instantly
update the Daily Reports. Data sent to OnLine will give the RM all the available reports for review. OnLine will be ‘synchronized’ with the rig such
that reports available on the rig will be available to the Rig Manager. In the process of sending daily information, the OIM is ‘Validating’ the content of
the information. The act of validating is an acceptance by the OIM that the information sent is correct. In this process, the information on the rig that
is validated becomes ‘write protected’. All personnel can review it on the unit, however it cannot be edited. Refer to Data Exchange: Flow of
Information.
Note: FOCUS, Incident, Operational Event and HSE meeting reports must be reviewed and validated by the Rig Manager before they are displayed
to other users of OnLine. Only the Rig Manager associated with the particular rig can see unapproved reports.
This ‘Send Daily Data’ (or ‘Validation’) function can be undertaken once a day, multiple times a day or even once a week. The transfer between the
Rig and OnLine is a transfer of ‘Reports’. Reports are generated on a daily or a well basis. When reports are transferred from the rig to OnLine/Rig
Manager, they become validated and are no longer available for edition. In subsequent ‘Send Daily Data’ actions these reports that are validated are
not resent. Only new or ‘un-validated’ information (reports) are transferred to the Rig Manager.
Click on ‘Send Daily Data’ and the following will occur:
Rig Identification Screen Will Appear: When you send daily data you will be prompted to check that the recipient details are correct. Namely the Rig
Manager’s name, e-mail address and the return e-mail address. This is the address that GRS-OnLine will send back validated reports to on the Rig.
If the Rig changes countries or region(s) changes can be made in this screen.
When you are happy with the details on this screen click ok. Hit cancel if you do not want to keep changes that have been made.
Send Focus information: This screen lists FOCUS proposals which are Medium or High Priority, have had the ‘Waiting for Approval’ click box
checked on the Focus Report page and will be sent onwards to the Rig Manager for approval.

25 161
Cancel Sending: Will delay sending of selected report until the next batch
Open: Opens the selected FOCUS (Low Priority Proposal). By clicking anywhere on the record, an arrow >will show on the left hand side.
Click on Open to Open the proposal and exit ‘Send Daily Data’ Routine.
Cancel: Cancels ‘Send Daily Data’ Routine.
Next: Proceed to next stage of ‘Send Daily Data’ Routine.
Send Daily Data: This screen lists all reports that will be validated and sent onto OnLine/Rig Manager. Each report distinguished through their links
with a particular well, date and report number.
Cancel: Cancels ‘Send Daily Data’ Routine.

Next: Proceed to next stage of ‘Send Daily Data’ Routine.

26 161
Send Daily Data – Configuration: Refer to Send Data - Configuration Screen. Sent zip files for Send Daily Data from Rig Location will have the
following format:
GRS-Rig_Rig ID_Rig Name_Date_Time (hh-mm).zip
For example: GRS-Rig_58_JIC_03-Oct-2001_19-29.zip (Rig: Jim Cunningham).
Ø Data Exchange: Import Base Information (Rig Location)
GRS allows only a two way process, movement of information is from either the Rig to OnLine(from Rig Manager) or from the OnLine(Rig Manger)
back to the Rig. Only Operational Event, Incident, FOCUS ((Medium & High), FOCUS Updates) and HSE Meeting reports are sent from OnLine(Rig
Manager) back to the Rig. Approved Operational Event, Incident and FOCUS reports (Medium & High) and FOCUS . Refer to Data Exchange: Flow
of Information.
Click on ‘Import Base Information’ and the following will occur:
GRS Data Import screen will appear.
File Path: Displayed the path where the zip file of FOCUS Reports and Updates have been placed
Browse: Click on Browse to select the path where the zip file of FOCUS Reports and Updates will be placed. Each import FOCUS Reports and
Updates file will be of the following format:
GRSUpdate_Rig ID_Rig Name_Date_Time (hh-mm).zip
For example: GRSUpdate_58_JIC_03-Oct-2001_19-29.zip (Rig: Jim Cunningham)
Launch Import: Mouse click starts the process of importing and loading to the database the zip file of FOCUS Reports and Updates.
Ø Data Exchange: Export a Well
GRS has the ability to Export entire Well Information so a separate GRS location, whether it be another Rig unit or shore based location, can review
and in some cases make comparison analysis of the information. However, this functionality has been removed from the GRS-Rig application and is
now available from GRS-OnLine only.
Please contact GRS-Support if you need an existing GRS well.
Exported Information is in the form of reports (i.e.: DOR I & II, Mud Reports, Run Reports, Well Information Report, etc). When received by the
recipient GRS location, the reports cannot be altered or amended as they will be write protected. The Data Analysis facility in GRS will be able to
able to generate the standard reports from this Well Information.
Well exported zip files will have the following format:
GRS-Well_Wellname(Rig ID_GRS Well Number_Date well Created)_Date_Time (hh-mm).zip
For example: GRS-Well_Devnick_(66_1_14-May-2001)_01-Nov-2001_11-07.zip (Rig: Paul B Lloyd)

27 161
Ø Data Exchange: Import a Well
GRS has the ability to Import entire Well Information from a separate GRS location. This allows the particular GRS location to be able to review and
in some cases make comparison analysis of the information. Import as well does exactly what it states: Exports Well Information Only. It does not
import a database (i.e. POB, Tubular Inventory, Marine Reports, Departmental activity reports, QHSE information, etc).
Imported Information is in the form of reports (i.e.: DOR I & II, Mud Reports, Run Reports, Well Information Report, etc). When imported, the reports
cannot be altered or amended as they will be write protected. The Data Analysis facility in GRS will be able to able to generate the standard reports
from this imported Well Information.
Click on ‘Import a Well’ and the following will occur:
Well Import screen will appear.
• At a Rig Location: Well available for Export will be displayed. Click on the specific Well that will be exported. The Well will highlight in blue.
• At a Rig Manager Location: Rig unit Rig Unit ID number will be displayed. Click on the specific Rig Unit and Well that will be exported. The Rig
and Well will highlight in blue.
Cancel: Cancels ‘Export a Well’ Routine.
Next: Proceed to next stage of ‘Export a Well’ Routine.
Well Import: Specified into which GRS system the well is being imported (Rig or Rig Manager Location).
File Path: Displayed the path where the zip file of FOCUS Reports and Updates have been placed
Browse: Click on Browse to select the path where the zip file of FOCUS Reports and Updates will be placed. Each import FOCUS Reports and
Updates file will be of the following format:
For example: GRS-Well_Devnick_(66_1_14-May-2001)_01-Nov-2001_11-07.zip (Rig: Paul B Lloyd)
Launch Import: Mouse click starts the process of importing and loading to the database the zip file of Reports.
Ø Data Exchange: Import Company Data
This function gives GRS the ability to import important company data. Importing this file provides any updates of the Company organization. For
example adding or removing countries, districts or regions. Also if required the fixed Nationalities and Positions list can be updated.
Click on Import Company Data and the following screen appears:
The file will be generated and sent by OnLine via E Mail. Save the file somewhere safe
.
Browse: Browse for the zipped file sent by GRS-OnLine, select and click OK for it to show in the ‘File Path’ window.

28 161
View Contents: Shows the information contained within the zip file detailed show in the ‘File Path’ window.
Launch Import: Will import the data contained in the zip file and overwrite in the relevant info in the Database.
Ø Operational: Close/Revisit a Well
The ‘Close/Revisit a Well’ function in GRS is used to remove the well from access by the user or re-open an Imported or Closed well. A Closed well
will still remain available for performance and comparative analysis with other wells. During 7 days after the Well has been closed, data can still be
corrected to change any incorrect or incomplete previous input. However, Reports cannot be added: The well "New Day" and "New Run" functions
are disabled when closing the well.
This functionality is to be related Delete Data/Delete a Well function. Once Closed and after a time considered by the user as being relevant, it can
be deleted from the Rig Database, using the Delete Data function. The information will have been consolidated on the GRS-OnLine Database.
A Closed Well can be re-imported on any Rig for display of information and for a possible Revisit of an existing Well.
A closed well can NOT be reactivated to ‘continue’ with operation. Closing a well should only be done when it no further activity will be undertaken on
it. Re entries, work-overs etc can be given different Well names.
Click on Close a Well and the Close a Well screen appears. Select the well which requires closing from the available open wells in the drop down
menu.
Close the Well: Click to complete the close a well action. The well will be available for the next 7 days to update or changes if required. Warning will
appear to confirm action.
Cancel: Exit screen without action on screen.
The Revisit a Well function can be used when a workover is to be performed on a Closed well, whether the well was initially done by the Rig and is
still in the database or the well was imported from a GRS-OnLine Well export file.
Ø Operational: Customize Units
This utility allows the user to change the units used in GRS at any moment of the well. The user could select a pre defined Unit system or create their
own specific unit system. From one well or operator to another, the units can be re-defined. Previous well information recorded or imported into the
units GRS system will be viewed in the current unit system.
Click on Customize Units and the Unit Systems log will appear.
There are three pre-defined unit systems set up with GRS. These systems are based on previous experience.
View: Shows the specific parameters and their unit definition within the selected GRS unit system. This cannot be edited.
New: Displays a copy of the units system that was in focus before New was clicked. Units against each parameter can be changed to options
available in the drop down boxes. Note that in some cases, such as small length and diameter, there requires to be similarly in unit systems. If this is
the case, a warning will show. Click OK to save the unit system under the Unit System Name defined at the top of the screen, or Cancel to quit which
out making any changes.
Delete: Deletes a Unit System. Can not delete any of the three predefined systems.
Set Current: Configures GRS to the Unit system highlighted in Blue.
Note: When GRS is configured in a network, Unit System changes cannot be made unless all users are logged off GRS. Unit System changes are
made at the database level, not at the local client level.

29 161
Ø Operational: Operational Classification
Operational Classification gives GRS the ability to ‘group’ separate operations together so if required, the user can undertake performance/data
analysis.
This utility allows the user to change the following ‘Classifications’ set against the three operational codes available for operations: IADC Code, NPT
Code & NPT Reason. A number of ‘Classifications’ can be set to suit different operating environments.
Family, Downhole Flag, Rotating Flag, Pumping Flag and drilling Flag cannot be changed.
Click on Operations Classification and the Operations Classification log will appear.
There one pre-defined Classification systems set up with GRS. This system is based on previous experience.
View: Shows Operation Classification screen with the specific parameters and their classification definition within the selected GRS Classification
system. This cannot be edited.
OK: Mouse click saves data on screen and exit screen.
Cancel: Exit screen without saving data on screen.
New: Displays a copy of the classification system that was in focus before New was clicked. Classifications against each parameter can be changed
to options available in the drop down boxes. Click OK to save the classification system under the Name defined at the top of the screen, or Cancel to
quit which out making any changes.
Delete: Deletes a classification System. Cannot delete the predefined system.
Set Current: Configures GRS to the Classification system highlighted in Blue.
Note: When GRS is configured in a network, Classification System changes cannot be made unless all users are logged off GRS. Classification
System changes is made at the database level, not at the local client level.
Ø Administration: Rig Creation
GRS Rig is fundamentally two elements:

1. Database
2. Application
The Database is where all information is stored. It includes storage of Rig, Well, Personnel Information. It also includes specific configuration
information such as Rig Identifier, whether is it a Rig or Rig Manager system, the number or and type of Users and report statuses (whether they
have been sent or validated etc).
The Application is an acceptable and presentable interface between the User and the database.
Upon installation of GRS, the Database requires to be configured for a particular rig. Selecting ‘Rig Creation’ will initialise the database for the Rig
Unit defined, as all information that is subsequently entered into the database will be tagged with this unique Rig Identifier.
Rig creation can only be effected by the GRS administrator.
At the Rig Location only one (1) rig unit can be created. At the Rig Manager Location, multiple (1,2 3, or more) rig units can be created.
Click on ‘Rig Creation’ and the Rig Creation Screen will appear.
Select the rig from the left hand section of ‘TSF Rigs’ available for creation. Click on the specific Rig Unit and it will highlight in blue. Click on the right
pointing arrow to transfer the selected rig from the left hand section to the right hand section. If you wish to deselect the rig, on the specific Rig Unit
and then click on the left pointing arrow to transfer the selected rig from the right hand section to the back to the left hand section.
If multiple rigs are to be created, continue to move rig units from the left to the right until your selection is complete.
Note: Once a rig has been created, and the ‘OK’ button selected, it cannot be removed.

30 161
Ø Administration: Revise Validated Reports
Reports sent from the Rig GRS-OnLine via the Data Exchange: Send Daily Data (RIG Location) function, ‘validates’ the reports. This validation
flags the reports as being sent (so they are not resent) and sets the reports as write protected Once a report is sent, subsequent alterations to the
reports cannot be made by any individual.
There will be situations that will require editions or corrections to sent reports. The Revise Validated Reports function allows the specific report to be
invalidated. Through invalidation the report will be write/edit enabled (changes can be made) and the ‘sent’ flag will be removed (it is available for
resending when sending the next daily data to the rig Manager).
Only a User with an ‘Offshore Management’ profile (group) can Revise Validated Reports.
Click on ‘Revise Validated Report’ and Revise Validated Report screen will appear.
There are three section that give options in how to unvalidate one or a group of reports.
Section 1
Revise All For Selected Date: Select a date using the Calendar. Click ‘Revise all for the selected dates’ and all the reports for that day will be edit
enabled.
Section 2
Report Type: Select report type to be revised from the drop down selection.
Well Name: If the report is related to a specific well, select the well name from the drop down selection. Note: if the Report type is not well related,
this ‘Well Name’ will not show any selection. Leave empty.

31 161
From/To Date: Select a date using the Calendar.
Revise All For Above Period of Time: This feature will edit enable all of the selected report type for a user specified period of time. Make sure the
date fields are filled in
Section 3
On the basis of the report type and Well Name (if applicable), the relevant reports will be displayed. Select a report by clicking anywhere on the
record, an arrow > will show on the left hand side.
Edit Enable: Select the particular report that requires Edit Enabling. Click on Edit Enable button and the report selected will be removed from the
selection. Note: only one report at a time can be Edit enabled.
Close: Closes Revise Validated Report screen.
Ø Administration: User Accounts

1. Database
2. Application
Before a User can access the GRS Database, the database must be configured to receive the User. This provides a level of security to the system
so that
• Only authorized personnel can view/interact with GRS
• Authorized personnel can have different level of access to GRS.
Click on ‘Users Accounts’ and the Users Account screen will appear.
The screen will display the Group Category and the User. The Group Category defines the Level of Access the User will have to the system.
New User: Creates a new User and User Profile in the Database. Click on New User button and Users screen will appear.
User: Insert the User name. This should be the name or nickname of the user. It should not be position as there are normally numerous
users to one position. The position of the user is better defined in the Group.
Group: Insert Group the User will belong to. This defines the level of access the user will have in the GRS system and is defined here.
Password/Confirm Password: Enter and repeat the password.
Rig Allocation: Defines which Rig Unit the User is authorized to. Allocation is made by clicking in the black empty box located to the left of
each Rig Unit. Click in the box again to deselect the Rig Unit.
Delete User: Delete the User from the GRS database. Click on the User to select for Deletion.
Modify User: Allows modification of User name, Profile, password and Rig allocation. Click on Modify User button and Users screen will appear.
Details as above.
Close: Closes Users Account screen.
Ø Administration: User Accounts: Rig Manager
Previous version 3.0 of GRS included a GRS-Rig profile of ‘Rig Manager’ to facilitate the Rig Manager validation process within GRS, should the rig
manager be on the rig. This negates the need for data transfer to and from OnLine to approve and verify reports, when the Rig Manager is in the
immediate vicinity of the rig Database.
Logging on as Rig manager profile will provide the user views of reports similar to that shown OnLine in Rig Manger profile. Full rig Manger
functionality will be provided to Incident Reports, OER’s and FOCUS.
Rig Manager actions on the rig DB will be sent to OnLine on the next data send and will update OnLine.

32 161
Ø Administration: Database Connection

1. Database
2. Application
Database Connection allows the user to define which database is being viewed. In most cases, there will be one database per unit in use. However
due to backups there may be multiple databases available should the system crash.
Click on ‘Database Connection’ and the GRS-Rig: Database Connection Configuration Screen will appear.
Browse: Click on Browse to select the path where the ‘mdb’ database file of GRS Database is placed. Once database file is located highlight the file
and click ‘Open’. The GRS Database file selected is displayed in the GRS Data File Path.
Connect: Connects the GRS application to the GRS Database file selected and displayed in the GRS Data File Path. Note: For Window
NT,Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems, the NT domain administrator must make the necessary connections between the
application and the database. NT,2000 and XP will not allow network modifications or links to be made unless they are created by an authorized
administrator.
Ø Administration: Unlock User
When a User is logged into GRS-Rig, the database recognizes that user against the defined list of User Accounts, will record the computer name and
makes a note that the user is active in the GRS system.
Should the User not log out when completed his or her work or experiences a crash with the application where the user is not logged off from the
database, in using the same computer, GRS will automatically unlock the user in the database user control and allow log-on.
Should the User not log out when completed his or her work or experiences a crash with the application where the user is not logged off from the
database, and then attempt log on a different computer, GRS will note that the User is all ready connected on the first computer and not allow
secondary Logon. The user’s name will need to be reset in the database.
User disconnection allows access into the User Logon section of the database and resets that User as ‘Logged Off’, allowing subsequent Log On.
This access to the User Logon section can only be made by the GRS administrator and Offshore management.
Click on ‘Users UnLock’ and the Unlocking Users screen will appear.
Rig Units defined in the database are displaced on the left. User account currently ‘Logged On’ in the database for the particular rig Unit selected are
displayed on the right.
Selection of Individual Rig Units or Users are made by clicking in the black empty box located to the left of each Rig Unit/User. Click in the box
again to deselect the Rig Unit/User.
Select All/Unselect All: Select/Unselect all Rig Units/Users defined in the database. You must define the Rig Unit before the User ‘Logged On’ will
appear on the right hand side.
Unlock: Once the User is selected, click Unlock to disconnect or ‘Log Off’ the User.
Close: Closes User Disconnect screen.
Ø Administration: Delete Data :Wells
A Well that has been closed since more than 7 days can be deleted from the Rig Database. A well can not be deleted unless it has been closed
through the Close a Well function. All the well-related information will be cleaned-up and removed from the GRS Database. Daily rig related reports
such as POB, Marine Report etc are not deleted. It is important to make an Export of the Well prior to deleting the data on a backup purpose.
Click on Delete Data and the Delete Data screen will appear. Select a closed well for deletion from the GRS Database.
After clicking on the "Delete" button, a Confirmation message appears.
OK: Mouse click deletes the Closed well highlighted and exit screen.

33 161
Ø Administration: Delete Data: Unsent Reports
GRS Version 3 provides the user with the ability to delete any unsent reports that may have been created in error. If a report needs to be deleted, it
is important to delete the report BEFORE it is sent to OnLine. Once a report is sent (a validated) it is replicated OnLine and can not be removed as it
has been logged and give a number. Event if a report is then unvalidated, it can not longer be deleted
Click on the Delete Data: Unsent Reports and the following screen will appear.
The screen below the ‘Report Type’ will display reports that have not been sent to OnLine and are available for deletion.
Select a report by clicking anywhere on the record, an arrow > will show on the left hand side.
Delete: Delete the highlighted report.

34 161
Ø Administration: Delete Data: Obsolete Reports
GRS-Rig provides the user with the ability to delete any obsolete reports that are more than 36 months old. When deleted these reports and no
longer available. However they are still stored on GRS-OnLine. Using this feature will also free up some database space.
It will still be possible to re-import archived well information
Click on the Delete Data: Obsolete Reports and the following screen will appear.
Select all Listed Report: The screen below the ‘Report Type’ will display all reports groups available in GRS-Rig that contain reports older than 36
months (based on the current computer date). Select the report that requires deletion by ticking the box on the left.
Delete: Delete the highlighted reports that are 36 or greater months old. The delete function will not delete reports that are less than 36 month old,
even if the report group is selected.

35 161
Ø Administration: Backup Data
It is imperative that GRS is backed. It is highly recommended that GRS is backed up on a daily basis. Failure to do so may result in the permanent
loss of data. It is also recommended that the backup should be run on another computer that does not contain the database. If the database is
located on the Rig Server, this machine is generally backed up. If the server was to fail and the administrator finds that either :
a) GRS was not being backed up in the first place.
b) It is going to take a extended period of time to re-build the server.
Then data could be lost or report generation is delayed.
Selecting backup data brings up the Backup Configuration Screen. This screen gives the administrator the ability to backup the database.
This screen also shows the last computer used to backup GRS and the date of this backup. It also shows wither or not if the last backup was
successful.
The administrator enters the schedule backup date, time and warning message time(minutes until backup is started). Next the user selects the
backup folder. The warning message warns users that the will be logged out of GRS in the time specified.
Backup can be run from any computer using the GRS application so the administrator can easy change the computer used for backup. If you decide
to change the backup computer the backup will be stopped on the previous machine and setup to backup on the new machine.
Ø Send Data - Configuration Screen
Send Data – Configuration: This screen allows the automatic generation of a zip file which can be either be sent by E Mail or transferred to file for
onward transfer by floppy disk. The zip file will contain all reports or information that is required to be transferred.
Click on the E Mail check button. This facility will automatically link with the E-mail program. It will work only with Eudora, Outlook and Outlook
Express. For CC Mail you must create a File and attach the file when creating an E Mail separately from GRS.
Address: Enter the E Mail address of an additional e-mail notification recipient. If the address has been recorded in the E Mail list (Click on Blue
Underlined ‘Address’ to bring up a modify list ‘E Mail List’) the drop down box will display the preloaded entries.
E Mail List: Click on Blue Underlined ‘Address’ to bring up a modify list ‘E Mail List’. Enter the E Mail of one or many possible recipients.
Delete Line: By clicking anywhere on the line, an arrow >will show on the left hand side. Click on Delete to delete the line.
File: Click on the File check button. Use this function if you have no E Mail facility or if your E Mail system is not one of the supported systems
(above).
Dir. Path: Default path ‘C:\GRS-RIG_V1\Exported Data’ will be displayed showing where the ‘Send Daily Data’ zip file will be placed.
Browse: Click on Browse to select an alternative path where the ‘Send Daily Data’ zip file will be placed.
Send: Mouse click starts the process of the ‘Send Data’ zip file. Each send routine will create a zip file that will have a unique name format.

36 161
3. Rig Information
Ø Rig Identification
Rig Name, Rig Type: No data input is required to be put in these two fields; Transocean Corporate has stipulated this data. Should there be an error
in the information displayed, please contact the GRS Project Manager, contact details in the User Manual introduction.
Cost Center: Numerical field. Four digit Cost Centre number for the rig unit.
Area: use drop down menu (at present only World wide)
Region: use drop down menu.
District: use drop down menu.
Country: use drop down menu
Top Drive: or Kelly: (You can only Check one): This refers to how your Rig set-up and assists with the generation of the Pipe Tally Report. (Note:
Kelly is not for a Cmt Kelly).
If you choose a Kelly then enter the Kelly length in the appropriate box.
If you choose a Top Drive then you must make an entry in the Drill Pup Joint box.
Drill Pup Joint
• Top Drive drilling with saver sub enter zero 0.0
• Top Drive Drilling with Pup joint - Enter the length of pup i.e. 10.00
Rig Manager Name: Enter the address of the Rig Manager. This address is used to notify he/she when a report has be sent to online
Return Address: This address is used to define the location where the GRS-OnLine application will send validated reports back to the Rig.

37 161
Ø Multi-Activity
Rig Name and Class: No data input available in these two boxes. Data is automatically assigned in Initial Set Up
If your rig is classed as "Standard" then the text "Not applicable for this type of Rig" and you have nothing to do in this screen so close.
Support Operations: If you select the check box you will be able to enter support operations (on the operations breakdown). These operations are
support rotary, mousehole and moonpool. These selections are only applicable if they used in a supporting role. They do not undertake any
critical path, revenue generating operations.
If you rig is classed as an "Enterprise" rig then you will see a screen with 3 locations.
1st location will be termed FWD or AFT Rotary table, which you choose from the drop down menu.
2nd location will be termed FWD or AFT Rotary table defaulting as per choice for first location.
3rd Location will be the mousehole and you cannot change it.
If you rig is classed as an "Express" rig then you will see a screen with 3 locations.
1st location will be the Rotary table, which you cannot alter.
2nd location will be termed Starboard MH or Port MH that you choose from the drop down menu.
3rd Location will default from your 2nd location choice Starboard MH or Port MH

38 161

Ø Tour Configuration
File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Rig Info/Tour Configuration
Tour Configuration defines the format for the IADC report (2 or 3 tour format) and obliges the user to provide Operational Information for the Tour
Period specified. A 0:00 to 12:00 tour requires the user to complete operation information for this period. A singular operation which runs from 10:00
to 14:00 will have to be declared twice, once from 10:00 to 12:00 for the 1st tour and secondly from 12:00 to 14:00 for the 2nd tour.
Tour 2: Check here if your Rig uses 2 x 12 hr shifts per 24 hr period

Tour 3: Check here if your Rig uses 3 x 8 hr shifts per 24 hour period
Time First Tour Start: Drop down menu appears. Select start of time period.
Time Second Tour Start: This is defaulted from first tours start time selected.


39 161
Ø Rooms Database
File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Rig Information/Rooms Database.
On the majority of rig units, the assignment of Escape is based on the allocation of Beds. In GRS, the Escape assignments can be entered, so when
an individual is assigned a bed, the escapes will automatically be assigned as well.
On units where escapes are not assigned according to beds, the POB allows edition so that these escapes can be correctly entered.
Screen appears with Rig Name, which is default set.
You must enter a Bed Room number then assign an escape definition to it. The escape definition is selected using the pull down menu.
Room and Bed Columns: Enter Room/bed number. Use existing rig numbering format. An example may be: Room 1, Bed A = 1A. or Deck B,
Room 22, Bed C = B22C.
Note: This field sorts alphanumerically. If the numbers of the rooms have two integers (i.e. no more than the number 99) then single
numbers (i.e. 2 or 3) will require a 0 in front of them. The same rule applies if the largest room number is three integers the must put 2 zero
in front of single numbers & one zero in front double numbers. In both cases this is to make the list sort numerically. Named cabins (i.e. Ch
Eng) will appear at the bottom of the list in alphabetical order. The list will sort after you save the data by clicking O.K.& return to the screen.

40 161
To define a escape definition hit the Edit Escape definition button. The following screen will appear:
Esc Num: There can be a MAXIMUN of 8 Escapes defined in GRS. A new line will appear to fill in the enxt escape once a complete line is filled out.
Escape Name: Enter a description of the escape: Escape 1, Lifeboat A, Life raft 1, etc….
Report as Primary & Secondary: This defines what numbers of personnel are displayed in the Escape section of the Daily POB report. Example
based on the above Escape Definitions setup as follows:
There are 4 columns available for each Primary and secondary row. In the ‘Escape Definition Screen’ above, there are only 4 columns available for
selection in the drop down box. In the above case only 3 columns have been declared with Escapes for both Primary and secondary.
Above Example: In the POB report:
• When an individual is declared with 1 in the primary escape column, based on the above definition, they will contribute to the Primary: Lifeboat
1
• When an individual is declared with 5 in the secondary escape column, based on the above definition, they will contribute to the Secondary:
Liferaft A
• When an individual is declared with 5 in the primary escape column, based on the above definition, they WILL NOT contribute to any reported
primary escape in the POB report as only 1,2 & 3 are being reported.

Delete: Deletes an identified line.

41 161
Ø Crew Assignment Definition
This is used to assign a crew to a particular person (this is done in the personnel database) or can be used in the HSE Meeting report to associate
a crew with a particular meeting.
Also when this crew member is arrived on the POB Report his crew assignment should show on this report.
To define the crew, simply enter a crew title into the Crew Title Box and select the Tour Period using the drop down menu.
The Tour Period consists of:
• Drill Day (12:00 – 24:00)
• Drill Night (00:00 – 12:00)
• General Day (12:00 – 24:00)
• General Night (00:00 – 12:00)
Save and Exit: Saves the changes or additions and exits the screen:
Delete: Erases the selected line.
Cancel: Closes the screen and cancels the changes.

42 161
Ø Rates & Codes
File Path: GRS rig / Rig Selected/Rig Information/Rates & Codes

Rates and Codes screen as follows:
Since GRS-Rig version 3.0, the Rates can be well specific as the rig unit changes from client to client. Simply Select the Well Name, and then enter
the appropriate contract percentage assigned to new rates. Rates and copdes defined on a previous well can be copied over to the new well.
The rates are used in the operations breakdown and are assigned to a particular line. This rates are then used to calculate the values in the Rig
Rates Report.
Well Name: Select the Well name the RATES apply to.
Rate Name & Rate Code: Rates 1, 2 & 3 are already defined as Operating / Standby & Repair and that these are in blue boxes and so you cannot
change them. You may add other rates by entering them in the white box below the other rates. After naming the giving a code number a new line
will appear so you can add as many rates as your contract dictates.
Contract %: GRS only assigns operational hours against each of these Rates. It does not calculate actual USD revenue. Enter remarks here such
as: ‘100%’ or ‘90% 1st 20 hours’… to help identify each of the rates to your rigs particular contract requirements.
Delete Line: This deletes the selected code line.
Copy Rates: This copies the rates from one well to another. To do this:
• In the ‘Well name (from)’ on the top of the screen, selected the Well you wish to copy From,
• In the ‘Well name (to)’ on the bottom of the screen, selected the Well you wish to copy To,
• Hit the ‘Copy Rates’ button and the rates are copied.

43 161
Code IADC Column: All Defaults as per IADC Report
Operation Column: All Defaults as per IADC
(Note: there are 6 IADC codes, which can be, assigned Rig Specific Operations not defined in the default IADC codes).
Rate Column: Rate codes as previously defined will only show in a drop down menu.
GRS will for a particular operation, automatically assign an IADC code to that operation. By defining a Rate as previously defined against the IADC
code, GRS will be able to automatically assign a rate to that same operation. (Example: Repair Rate 3 is 0% contract revenue. IADC code 8 is
‘Repair Rig’. When an operation is determined to be IADC code 8, GRS will also assign Rate Code 3 against the operation).

NOTE: The IADC codes are independent from the Rates. It is possible to copy the rates from a previous well. The IADC Codes are static
(Do not copy from a previous well) and remain the same until changed.
Ø Equipment Configuration
This list is optional until you have an Event/ Downtime for a piece of equipment. So the rig has the option to enter all the equipment at anytime or you
can build the list of equipment as events dictate allowing the list to grow.
This screen now includes is a PSS builder that is specific to each rig. It was added to assist and improve the data entry on this screen. To use the
PSS Builder simply click on the blue field and make the required selection.
The PSS builder can be opened by clicking on any of the blue fields called PSS, Manufacturer or Model. In filling out the PSS, it will update the
Equipment Category and Subcategory to match the PSS code entered.
Equipment: Mud Pumps Enter the relevant data here
Equipment Category: Mud Pump /HP Pump Enter the relevant data here. Selection is fixed from a drop down menu that can not be edited.
Equipment Sub Category : Fluid End Enter the relevant data here. Selection is fixed from a drop down menu that can not be edited.
Important Note: Equipment Subcategory in SOME instance will not be automatically associated with a Category. Should this happen, the
Subcategory will remain blank and will require the user to select an appropriate entry from the drop down menu.

44 161
PSS: KB 1234 From the PSS Builder
Manufacturer: National From the PSS Builder
Model: 12-P-160 From the PSS Builder
S/N: 1234567A Enter Serial Number.
Date Installed: 01/01/03 From the Calendar Input Screen.
Delete Current Line: Place cursor anywhere on a particular equipment record. Click the mouse and a small (>) will appear on the left-hand side of
the record showing you the line selected. Click delete current line button and record will delete.
Ø Mud Pump Definition
Manufacturer: Enter Manufacturer

Liner Diameter: Enter Decimal Units only (6.500), not fractions (6 ½)
Note: do not forget to change this information when the Mud Pump liners are changed as relates to other information in these reports such
as Flow Rates in DOR (Daily Operations Report) Part 2.
Stroke length: Enter Decimal Units only (12.00), not fractions (6 ½)
Type: Triplex or Duplex, you must choose using the drop down menu, which will appear when you click on the arrow in the appropriate box.
• If selected, then "Piston rod diam" will need to be Triplex is selected, "Piston rod diam" will turn blue as it is not required.
• If Duplex is entered. Enter Decimal Units only (3.00), not fractions (6 ½).
Pressure Rating: This is to be set relevant to Max Liner Pressure pertaining to liner installed in Pump.
Efficiency %: Enter a figure here the efficiency that the rig uses. Enter a decimal i.e: 98
Ø Tubulars Description
GRS rig / Rig selected/Rig Information/Tubular description
This screen defines the strings of Pipe, Tubulars & Riser that the rig uses. Information from this screen is used to define tubulars reported on the
Departmental Activity Report and Tubular Riser Report. "This is not the Tubular Database and it has a link with the Tubular Database".
Click here for link to Drill Pipe/HW Drill Pipe.
Click here for link to Drill Collars.
Click here for link to Riser Joints.
Note: When entries have been made in the Tubular Riser Report the relevant Drill Pipe/ HW Drill pipe, Collars and Risers will be blued out to
protect these items. If not blued out and a user changes these values in the Tubular Riser report will be lost.

45 161
Ø Tubulars Description: Drill Pipe/HW Drill Pipe
Drill Pipe/HW Drill Pipe type: If you click in the first column under DP Type an arrow showing you a drop down menu will appear you must choose
either Drill Pipe Or HW Drill Pipe.
Nominal size/ Nominal Weight: information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the
Tubular Inventory Catalogue that can be accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column titles Nominal Size or Nominal Weight.
Avg-ID: This field defines the average ID of the Drill Pipe or Heavy Weight Drill Pipe.
Range: This defines the Pipe Range (drop down menu 1,2 or 3).
FN OD: This defines the fish neck OD.
Grade: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Modify List Grade that can be
accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Grade’.
Upset: Select one from the drop down menu, which contains the 3 most common (you cannot add to this list). But this column is optional so no
selection has to be made.
Thread: information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Modify List -Threads that can
be accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Threads’.
Owner: Click on Drop down menu, default is set to TRANSOCEAN, Client or Other Client as in operator items (Other possibly on loan or rented).
Ø Tubulars Description: Drill Collars
Drill collar type: If you click in the first column under DC Type an arrow showing you a drop down menu will appear you must choose either DC-
Monel, DC-Pony, DC-Smooth, DC-Spiral & DC-Square.
Nominal size/ Nominal Weight: information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the
Tubular Catalogue that can be accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column titles ‘Nominal size’ or ‘Nominal Weight’.
Thread: information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Thread Modify List that can be
accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Threads’.
Owner: Click on Drop down menu, default is set to Transocean, Client or Other Client as in operator items (Other possibly on loan or rented).
Ø Tubulars Description: Riser Joints
Nominal Size: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Riser Catalogue that
can be accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Nominal Size’.
Wall Thickness: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Riser Catalogue that
can be accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Wall Thickness.
Connection Type: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Connection Modify
List that can be accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Connection Type’.
Set Length: Define the length for each riser set that will be reported in the Tubular Riser Report and the Risers inventory.
Ø Risers
You will see firstly that the screen has 2 tabs on the top of the screen, indicating three pages.
Riser Joints: Click on this Tab to access sets of Riser
X-Over's & Pup Joint: Click on this Tab To Input all Miscellaneous Riser Joints
At the bottom left corner of the Riser Dimensions screen not adjusted by the Tabbed pages is Buoyancy Type
Group: Input the various colour codes of Buoyancy on your rigs riser joints.
Can also group the riser as ‘Heavy Wall’ or ‘ex Sedco 702’ to maintain some separation form your main inventory of Riser.

46 161
Depth Rating from/to: Input a value here. Integer entry and not mandatory.
Ø Risers: Riser Joints:
Buoyancy Type: Click on Drop down menu, it will include ‘No Buoyancy’ and any ‘Groups’ that may be defined at the bottom left section of the
riser screen. Note: You can have as many ‘Groups’ of riser and each group you select will give you a new screen for that type. So when you review
you must remember that there maybe more than on screen of riser in a riser set.
Joint: Defaulted to numbered sequence by GRS.
S/N: Serial Number: Alphanumeric entry. Insert the Rig Specific Identification number or the Riser manufacturer serial number.
Nominal OD/Wall Thickness/Set Length: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are defined in the
Tubulars Description: Riser Joints screen.
Wt in Air per Jnt: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Riser Catalogue that
can be accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title Wt in Air/Jt’.
Kill Line ID: Enter Data here (Decimal).
Kill Line OD: Enter data here (Decimal).
Connection: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Connection Modify List
that can be accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Connection’.
Location: Drop Down Menu, select where the Riser is located
("Deck" means available for use)
("Derrick" means in use)
Buoy. Factor: Enter the buoyancy factor applicable to the joint. The factor will calculate with the wt in air value to determine the wt in water value for
the Riser running and pulling report.
Add Item: Click this button to direct cursor to a new record to insert a new riser joint into the list.
Delete Line: Place cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the mouse and a small (>) will appear on the left hand side of the record. Click
‘Delete line’ button and record will delete.
Ø Risers: X-Over & Pup Joints
Joint: Defaulted to numbered sequence by GRS.

S/N: Serial Number: Alphanumeric entry. Insert the Rig Specific Identification number or the Riser manufacturer serial number.
Length: Enter Data here (Decimal).
Manufacturer: Refers to manufacturer of the Riser Connection (Not the riser tubular). Input text i.e: Cameron or Vetco.
Nominal OD/ID/Wt in Air per Jnt: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the
Riser Catalogue that can be accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Nominal OD’, ‘ID’, Wt in Air/Jt’.
Kill Line ID: Enter Data here (Decimal).
Kill Line OD: Enter data here (Decimal).
Connection: information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Connection Modify List
that can be accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Connection’.
Location: Drop Down Menu, select where the Riser is located

47 161
("Deck" means available for use)
("Derrick" means in use)
Wet wt/Jnt: Enter the wet weight per joint. The joint being defined as the fixed length in Riser. Note: On this screen has as it says all the x/over &
pups of riser you will have to enter each variant of riser into the Riser Catalogue as each has a different weight in air.
Add Item: Click this button to direct cursor to a new record to insert a new riser joint into the list.
Ø BOP and Joints Measurement
This screen defines the fixed length and weight measurements of the units Sub sea Equipment in order to generate a Riser Running & Pulling
Report.
Click on the Tab to access the screens required. 3 screens available.
• BOP 1
• BOP 2
• Joints & Diverter
Ø BOP and Joints Measurement: BOP 1
Total Height: Enter the total height of BOP/LMRP including Annulars, Ball joint and Riser adaptor in the units defined.
Weight in Air: Enter the BOP unit weight in the units defined.
Weight Wet: Enter the BOP unit Wet Weight in the units defined.
Annulars 1 & 2: Enter reference heights in the units defined. Note depth taken from "Datum" (generally wellhead)
Rams: Space to enter up to 8: Enter reference heights in the units defined Note depth taken from "Datum" (generally wellhead)
Ø BOP and Joints Measurement: BOP 2
Total Height: Enter the total height of BOP/LMRP including Annulars, Ball joint and Riser adaptor in the units defined.
Weight in Air: Enter the BOP unit weight in the units defined.
Weight Wet: Enter the BOP unit Wet Weight in the units defined.
Annulars 1 & 2: Enter reference heights in the units defined. Note depth taken from "Datum" (generally wellhead)
Rams: Space to enter up to 8: Enter reference heights in the units defined Note depth taken from "Datum" (generally wellhead)
Ø BOP and Joints Measurement: Joints / Diverter
Slip Joint #: Enter Slip Joint Serial # E.g. 714-01

Overall Length: Enter Slip Joint Length (fully open) in the units defined.
Overall Length "at Mid Stroke": Enter Slip Joint Length at Mid Stroke in the units defined.
Weight in Air: Enter the weight in the units defined.
Weight Wet: Enter the buoyant weight in the units defined.
Diverter 1 and 2: Enter the length from "RKB to the top of slip joint" in the units defined.
Traveling Assembly: Enter weight in the units defined.
Riser Handing Tool: Enter weight in the units defined. (this can be described as a lifting nubbin ).

48 161
Ø Department Configuration
This screen defines which Departments will be required for generating Departmental Activity Reports
Note this list will as you create it here will come out alphabetically on the DOR (Daily Operations Report) Part 1.
Rig Departments: information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Department Modify
List that can be accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined title ‘Rig Departments’.
Ø Crew for IADC
This is the Crew, as it would appear on the IADC for each tour, Primarily Drill crew and Crane crew only check with OIM to verify his selection of
names to be reported on the IADC.
Positions: information is available though drop down menu lists in each cell. This Screen is defaulted with a pre-determined list "You cannot change
this pre-set list".
Ø TRIR-Total Record Incident Rate
File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Rig Information/TRIR Initialisation
TRIR =Total Record Incident Rate.

The 'Total Recordable Incident Rate' (TRIR) tracked by the company is a rolling rate over the previous 12 months. The rate utilizes Medical
Treatment Cases (MTC), Serious Injury Cases (SIC) and Fatality (F) figures plus Working hour figures over the past 12 months. Figures relating to
Transocean and Transocean Third Party (including Catering) personnel ONLY are applied in the TRANSOCEAN TRIR calculation.
When GRS is installed, it has no history of the units Man-hours or Incidents to be able to calculate a 12-month rolling average TRIR value.
Date of Initialization: Click on the white box for date and a calendar will appear and you choose the date for which the GRS will being to report
operations on the unit. Once an initialization date has been chosen, a table will appear for the previous years figures to be entered.
After this initialization date, GRS will record man-hours and applicable incidents from which the TRIR will calculate.


49 161
4. Personnel Compliance
Ø Personnel Database
The Personnel Database is used to store stable information on the Units personnel, whether they be Transocean, Transocean Third party or Client
personnel. Data stored in the POB Database will facilitate the generation of the Daily POB report, Marine Manning & Well Control Compliance
reports. It is extremely important that this information is correct when it is entered; GRS is designed to use drop-downs to make selections and these
are populated from information entered into the Personnel Database.
Note: If a person’s record is updated in the Personnel Database, these updates will not automatically show up on the POB report unless the
individual is removed from the rig and then re-arrived. Alternatively these changes can also be made on the POB report directly and will then carry
forward to the next days.
All columns can be sorted ascending or descending by right-clicking. None of these entries can be edited directly from this window.
New Entry: Brings up a blank ‘Edit Personnel Data’ screen used for entering information specific to individual employees
Edit Entry: Brings up the ‘Edit Personnel Data’ screen used for entering information specific to the individual employees highlighted in the Personnel
DB. Alternatively the user can double-click this individual highlighted in the Personnel DB and it will bring up the ‘Edit Personnel Data’ screen.
POB Database employee records are divided into two tabs; Company Info and Personnel Info. This information is entered through the use of drop-
down fields, pop-up windows or manual entry.
In the ‘Edit Personnel Data’ screen there is the following items:
1. On the Personal Info tab there is a small check-box that will be automatically selected if that person is currently on board.
2. The user can select a different individual from the ‘Select Name’ drop down list. When a new name is selected, the current record will be
saved and then the selected entry will then be displayed.
3. "Add New Personnel" button will save and close the current record and open up a blank one for creating a new record. This would be useful
if the user was making multiple new entries because it prevents having to OK each individual record and then click on "New Entry" from the
main window each time.
Delete Entry: Place cursor anywhere on a particular POB record. Click the mouse and the entire line will be selected. Click Delete Entry button and
record will delete.
Personnel Info Report: Brings up a window allowing the user to configure a Crystal Report by selecting Category(s) or Crew(s).
Onboard History Report: Allows a user to view and/or print an individuals onboard history by selecting the person from the main window, choosing
the desired months of history and clicking "View Report".
Quick Print: The provides a quick unformatted printed output of the entire personnel DB
Well Control: Click on ‘Well Control’ will bring up Well Control Certification Screen for the individual record currently highlighted.
Marine Manning: Click on ‘Marine Manning’ will bring up Marine Manning Certification Screen for the individual record currently in focus (focus
confirmed by a small (>) that appears on the left hand side of the record.)
Compliance: Click on ‘Compliance’ will bring up Compliance Requirement Screen.
Ø Personnel Data: Company Info
The data entry fields for Company Info are as follows:

Mandatory:
Last Name: This must be entered.
First Name: This must be entered.
Date of Birth: This must be entered. A pop-up calendar allows the user to select DOB.
Category: This must be entered. Select from the drop down list. (Note: Local agency personnel are considered TOI National.)
Not Mandatory:
Nationality: Selection is made from the drop-down and this information is not editable.
Sex: Select from the drop-down list.

50 161
Company: Selection is made from the drop-down. This list can be edited by clicking on the underlined "Company" text. Scroll to the bottom and
make a new entry in a blank field or select an existing company name to edit.
Position: Selection is made from the drop-down and this information is not editable.
Crew: Selection is made from the drop-down. This list can be edited by clicking on the underlined "Crew" text. Make a new entry in a blank field or
select an existing crew name to edit. Select a tour period from the list; this list cannot be edited. Select a Rotary Location (Enterprise-class only,
where applicable for Drill Crew). Options in the pop-up are Save & Exit, Delete and Cancel.
Cost Center: This field is automatically filled in when a new record is created. The number comes from Rig Information but can be manually edited if
required.
T-Card: An employee’s T-card number can be manually entered here as required.
Room/Bed #: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Rooms Database. Only
items on the drop down list are allowed in the cell. If the bed has escape definitions assigned to it, selecting the bed will automatically fill out
Primary/Secondary Escape.
Daily Hours: Enter the standard number of hours this employee works (GRS defaults to 12). If the entry is for a TOI employee there will be a check
box next to this field that must be selected or the employee will NOT show up on the Hourly Payroll report.
Primary/Secondary Escape: This information is automatically filled out from Escape Definitions through the Rooms Database if the selected bed
has these definitions associated with it. If not, they may be selected manually using the drop-down and can be altered at any time as required.
Evacuation Priority: Arranged from "Level 5 First to Leave" to "Level 1 Last to Leave", this selection is made using the drop-down. This can be
used to define requirements regarding critical personnel in the event of an emergency, storm evacuation etc. These entries can not be edited.
Primary/Standby Response: To associate an employee with a Response (Fire Team), type the information into this field (i.e. "TECH", BOAT", "3rd "
etc).
Date Assigned: Clicking in this field will bring up a calendar box where the user can select when this employee was assigned to the installation.
Time in Position: Fill in as required.
Ø Personnel Data: Personnel Info
The data entry fields for Personnel Info are as follows:

Address: Fill in as required.
City: Fill in as required.
State: Select a state from the drop-down, or edit the list as required by clicking on the underlined "State" text. This will display a pop-up window to
allow new entries.
P. Code: Fill in as required.
Country: Enter the employee’s country of residence in this field.
Spouse’s Name: If the person is married, check the "Married" box and enter their spouse’s name here.
Home Phone: Fill in as required.
Home Email: Fill in as required.
Emergency Contact: Fill in as required.
Emergency Contact Number: Fill in as required.
Employee #: Fill in as required. If the person is employed by TOI this number must be entered or it will not be automatically entered into Hourly
Payroll when the report is opened.
Rig Specified #: This allows the entry of a rig or region specific number…such as ‘MAPS’ for the UK or ‘xxx’ for the US.
Fly Point: Fill in as required.
Passport Number: Fill in as required.
Nationality: Automatically filled out from the entry from Company Info". This field can not be edited.
Date Of Issue: Select date using GRS Calendar as required.
Date Of Expiry: Select date using GRS Calendar as required.
Notes: Fill in as required.

51 161
Last Orientation: Select date using GRS Calendar as required.
Medical Expiry Date: Select date using GRS Calendar as required.
Ø Well Control Certification
Last Name, First Name & Position: Default from POB Database.
Type of Certification: Choose from drop down menu
Note: This is not a training database. It is to calculate Compliance. Assign personnel with Well Control Certification ONLY if their position is included
in the rig unit’s Compliance Requirement.
Go to Well Control Certification Status Report.
Delete: Deletes person’s association to certifications.
Ø Marine Manning Certification
Last Name, First Name, Position: Default from POB Database.

Type Of Certification On Station: Choose from drop down menu.
Type Of Certification Under Way: Choose from drop down menu.
GMDSS Certified: Check box if applicable.
Note: This is not a training database. It is to calculate Marine Compliance. Assign personnel with Marine Manning Certification ONLY if their Marine
Manning category is included in the rig unit’s Compliance Requirement.
Go to Marine Manning Certification Status Report.
Delete: Deletes person’s association to certifications.
Ø Compliance
This screen allows the Unit specific requirements for Well Control and Marine Manning to be specified. This information details the unit standard
against which the Compliance Status Reports are calculated.
Well Control
Position: Select a position from the drop-down list.
• Onboard: Determine the number of positions that require valid certification on the rig at any one time. For example the following positions
require certification on the rig. OIM, Toolpusher, Driller x 2, AD x 2 and the Subsea Supervisor. Onboard total required is 7.
• Total: Determine the number of unit assigned positions (whether they are on or off the rig) that require valid certification. For example the
following unit assigned positions require certification (on or off the rig). OIM x 2, Toolpusher x 2, Driller x 4, AD x 4 and the Subsea
Supervisor x 2. Total required is 14.
Marine On Station/Under Way
Certification: Select a Certification from the drop-down list.
Marine-On Station: Determine the number of valid certificates that are required on the rig to fulfil the specific category while On Station.
• Onboard: Determine the number of positions that require valid certification on the rig at any one time. For example the unit requires at any
one point in time while On Station the following categories: Master x 1, Chief Mate x 1, Able Seaman x 4 and Coxswain x 2..
total unit requirement for the following categories might be: Master x 2, Chief Mate x 2, Able Seaman x 8 and Coxswain x 4.

52 161
Marine-Under Way: Determine the number of valid certificates that are required on the rig to fulfil the specific category while Under Way.
• Onboard: Determine the number of positions that require valid certification on the rig at any one time. For example the unit requires at any
one point in time while Under Way the following categories: Master x 1, Chief Mate x 1, Able Seaman x 4 and Coxswain x 2..
total unit requirement for the following categories might be: Master x 2, Chief Mate x 2, Able Seaman x 8 and Coxswain x 4.
Delete: Select a certification/position to delete the line.
Ø Manhour Month Report
This function allows the user to generate Crystal Reports related to hours worked and is able to be extensively configured by the user to suit the rig’s
requirements. The user will be presented with a configuration window that will allow him/her to create report profiles for common tasks that can be
saved for repeated use.
Click the ‘Manhour Month Report’ radio button to create a Manhour report by month.
If opening an existing saved report, select it from the drop-down, select a month/date and click "Report", otherwise click "New" and enter a title.
New: This will put the user in *** NEW Criteria Mode *** where the Listing (by Company or Category) and Sorting (by Last Name or Position) can be
done using the radio buttons provided.
Add: Click on a Company/Category in the left pane and click "Add" to transfer it into the right pane. If the desired Company does not show up on this
list it must be added via the "Company" hyperlink in the Personnel Database. Multiple selections can be made using Shift (to select a span of
sequential entries) or Ctrl (to select specific ones).
Remove: If a mistake is made, selections can be made from the right pane in the same fashion and then removed from the pane by clicking
"Remove".
Save/Cancel: To save this report criteria click Save, otherwise click Cancel.
Edit Criteria: This report criteria can be edited at any time by selecting it from the drop-down and clicking "Edit Criteria", which will put the user in ***
EDIT Criteria Mode *** and allow the properties of the report to be changed.

53 161
Delete: Select a report criteria from the drop-down to delete it from the list.
Copy: A copy can be made of a selected report criteria to eliminate re-entering data for a report the user may want to create that is similar in most
respects to another pre-defined configuration. Select the original report in the drop-down list, click "Copy" and enter a new title. It can then be edited
as required and saved.
Report: To generate this report immediately, use the drop-down lists to select the month and year and click on "Report".
Note: Available printer shown on Print Screen is the default system printer, but other printers can be selected from this window as well. Define default
system printer though Printer settings in the Windows Control Panel.
File Export: Crystal Reports can also create a file (or digital) version of the report. This digital version can then be sent onwards as an E Mail
attachment.
Format: Select either ‘Adobe *.PDF File’ or ‘MS Excel *.XLS File’.
Destination: Allows the user to browse to a location they want to save the file in.
Ø Manhour Summary Report
This function allows the user to generate Crystal Reports related to hours worked and is able to be extensively configured by the user to suit the rig’s
Click the ‘Manhour Summary Report’ radio button to create a Manhour report that covers a specified period.
Clicking on the date boxes will allow the user to select a range of dates that define the period.
Click ‘Report for a Crystal Report that details man days and manhours generated in the defined period The days and hours worked will be totaled
according to specific Categories.
attachment.

54 161
Ø Personnel Reports
This function allows the user to generate Crystal Reports related to personnel and is able to be extensively configured by the user to suit the rig’s
saved for repeated use. This report is highly dependent on the data for personnel being entered correctly in the Personnel Database.
Personnel Report Title: Select an existing report from the drop-down or create a new one by clicking on "New". This will put the user in *** NEW
Mode*** at which time they can type a name for the report in the field.
To provide a means of sorting and dividing the personnel information in the Personnel DB, there are two levels of control applied
Active Personnel Only: This check box allows to restrict the output to personnel declared as Active on the Rig
Primary Control: Select a Primary Control from the list in the drop-down and check the boxes in the lower pane as required. These are fixed
selections and cannot be modified; click on the "All" button to check every possible control in the list or "Clear" to remove all checks.
Secondary Control: Select a Secondary Control from the list in the drop-down and check the boxes in the lower pane as required. These are fixed
selections and cannot be modified; click on the "All" button to check every possible control in the list or "Clear" to remove all checks.
Report Content: Choose from an extensive list of modifiers to refine the report. As modifiers are added the Total below the pane will increase
depending on the amount of room on the report the data will take. Keep this number below 13,000 to ensure the desired data fits on the report. The
Width for each selection is displayed on the far right and totalled at the bottom.
Sort By: Check a radio button to sort the final report by it’s modifier within each category.
As an example, a report could have a Primary as "Category" (Client, Transocean National) and a Secondary as "Position" (All) with Report Content
modifiers of "Last Name, First Name", "Contact Phone" and "Address" sorted by "Last Name, First Name". This would give a report broken up into
Category, with personnel listed alphabetically in each section and include their phone and home of record.
Delete Row: Select a line to remove from the modifier pane and click "Delete Row".
Copy: A copy can be made of a selected report to eliminate re-entering data for a report the user may want to create that is similar in most respects
to another pre-defined configuration. Select the original report in the drop-down list, click "Copy" and enter a new title. It can then be edited as
required and saved.
Edit Criteria: A report criteria can be edited at any time by selecting it from the drop-down and clicking "Edit", which will put the user in *** EDIT
Criteria Mode *** and allow the properties of the report to be changed. Save these changes or click Cancel to revert to the previous version.

55 161
Delete: Select a report criteria from the drop-down to delete it from the list.
Report: The report can be generated in two ways. If the user prefers to see the data for everyone in the Personnel Database, click on "Report". If
the user prefers to see the data for personnel on board select the "On Board" checkbox, click in the date field to pick a date from the calendar and
click "Report".
attachment.
Ø Well Control Training Status Report
Calculates and displays the calculated rig unit’s Compliance Value for Well Control in a Crystal Report. It compares the number of personnel
onboard that hold specific Well Control certification against the rig units defined well control certification requirement.
attachment.
Ø Marine Manning Status Report
Calculates and displays the calculated rig unit’s Compliance Value for Marine Manning in a Crystal Report. It compares the number of personnel
onboard and in total that hold specific categories of Marine Manning certification against the rig units defined marine manning requirement.
attachment.

56 161
5. QHSE
Ø Incident Report Log
Log is a list of all recorded incidents relating to the unit.

The Report Number, Date of incident, Incident Type, the first line of the ‘Brief Summary’, Rig Manager Approval status and Recordable status
are shown from each incident report.
Print: Provides a print output of the Incident Log.
View: Selects an existing report to view or amend. Place cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the cursor on the selected report line and a
small (>) will appear on the left-hand side of the record. Then click ‘View’. Selected Incident Report will appear.
Close: To close ‘Incident Report Log’ screen without progressing further into incident reporting, click ‘Close’.
New: To create a new incident report, click ‘New’. And the ‘Create New Incident Report’ screen will appear.
Ø Incident Report Screen
Information relating to filling out this report can be found in the HSE Policies and Procedures Manual, Section 4, Subsection 6.3.
Further guide to the process
When the report is on the screen you will see a report and you will notice that certain information will have defaulted from other areas of the GRS and
this information is contained in blue boxes and is unchangeable in this screen. The information you are required to enter in this report are identifiable
as the white areas.
Incident ID Number is automatically inserted.
Type of Report: Choose from only one of the four categories; Personnel, Property Damage, Environmental Damage and Near Hit / Serious Near Hit.
INITIAL FACTS
Installation/Facility, Rig Coordinates, Operator and Block No. / Lease are automatically inserted.
Well No: Drop down box allows selection from Wells currently available on GRS.
Time Zone: Select the time zone of the Installation/Facility with respect to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Nearest Port: Text box detailing the nearest port, either helicopter or boat.
Place of Occurrence on Installation/Facility: Text box to insert the specific location of the incident aboard/at the installation / facility.
Machine, Tool and/or Equipment Involved (if any): If any machines, tools or equipment were involved in the incident, these details are described
in the text box provided. Otherwise select ‘N/A’.
Initial evaluation of: Confirm selection of report type. The text box provided contains initial factual information surrounding the incident. Descriptive
terms used in this field should be general but accurate and true. Examples of these descriptive terms for each category would be (1) Personnel–
"Blunt trauma to right leg"; (2) Property Damage– Crown sheave appears cracked; (3) Environmental Damage– Light sheen seen on water from
approximately 1 gallon of hydraulic fluid spilled; (4) Near Hit / Serious Near Hit– Found 4" bolt on rig floor, unknown source.
PERSONNEL FACTS
Completed as required anytime the incident type is ‘Personnel’.
Name if Injured: Choose from the drop down list of names. The names will default to the personnel recorded on the POB report as being ‘On board’
on the date of the incident.
Employee Date of Birth, Age, Address, Telephone #, Employee #, Position and Employer should be automatically inserted. If the information is
not inserted it can by inputted manually.
Time in Position, Time Employed, Reported to supervisor date & time, Time shift started and time on shift completed as required.
Body parts affected: Specific body parts affected by the incident.
Medical treatment given: Specific medical treatment rendered without breaching any confidentiality aspects.
Detailed Incident Description (What did person say happened): This text box contains the employee’s statement exactly as stated. The
employee will sign under this statement on the printed form to verify the information is true and correct.

57 161
Describe Potential Injury or Damage: This information is completed only when the report type is Near Hit or Serious Near Hit.
Brief Factual Description of Activity at Time of Incident: This field is completed only when the report type is Property Damage, Environmental
Damage or Near Hit / Serious Near Hit. The ‘N/A’ field should be checked by default when the report type is Personnel.
OTHER INFORMATION
Follow-Up Actions Taken: List any follow-up actions taken immediately after the incident such as shut equipment down for inspection, etc.
Current Situation of: Detail of what current status is.
Witness Information: Choose from the drop down list of names. The names will default to the personnel recorded on the POB report as being ‘On
board’ on the date of the incident.
Employee Supervisor: Choose from the drop down list of names. The names will default to the personnel recorded on the POB report as being ‘On
IADC Information: Only relevant if ‘Personnel’ for ‘Type of Incident’ is selected. See Incident Report IADC Values.
OIM / Facility Manager: Choose from the drop down list of names. The names will default to the personnel recorded on the POB report as being ‘On
When Check box Ready to send is ticked, the report will be sent to the Rig Manager on the next OIM Validation of GRS. Further amendments will not
be possible. If you View you have no access to adjust the report.

Cancel: Exit screen without saving data on screen
Preview Print version of Incident Report: Use screen button at top of screen on the right of the print button.
Print Hardcopy of Incident Report: Use screen button at top of screen.
Ø Incident Report IADC Values
Only relevant if ‘Personnel’ for ‘Type of Incident’ is selected. \

Click the ‘IADC Information’ button on the bottom of the Incident Report Screen. The following screen will appear:
Select the most appropriate choice for each of the seven categories. This information is used to generate required reports to the IADC. Completion
of these values is mandatory for each incident report involving Company personnel, including Leased Labor.

58 161
Ø Incident Report Processing Flowchart
Ø Agreements Log
Log of all Agreements relating to specific unit or location.

The following details are contained on the log:
• Agreement date
• Initiator
• With whom the agreement was made
• Level of Agreement
• Category of agreement
Print: Prints the Agreements Log in its entirety.
View: Selects an existing Agreement to view or amend. Place cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the Cursor and a small (>) will appear on
the left hand side of the record. Then click ‘View’. Selected Agreement will appear.
New: To create a new Agreement, click ‘New’. The Agreement Process Screen will appear.
Close: To close ‘Agreements Log’ screen without progressing further, click ‘Close’.
For further information relating to the application and use of the Agreement Process, please contact Corporate QHSE.

59 161
Ø Agreement Process Screen
Rig Name is automatically inserted.

Date: Select the date from the calendar that appears.
Initiator: This is the OIM/Rig Manager that initiated the Agreement Process. Choose from the drop down list of names. The names will default to the
personnel recorded on the POB report as being ‘On board’ on the day of the agreement.
Has made agreement with: Choose from the drop down list of names. The names will default to the personnel recorded on the POB report as being
‘On board’ on the day of the agreement.
Agreement: Text box detailing information about the Agreement.
Category: Choose the most appropriate from the drop down list of categories. The categories are aligned with the major categories on the START
Observation Card.
Level: Choice of buttons 1 or 2.
Ø SQA Log
Log of all Service Quality Appraisal (SQA) Reports relating to specific unit or location. The log is a list of Report numbers and Dates of reports that
have been created.
View: Selects an existing report to view or amend. Place cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the cursor on the selected report line and a
small (>) will appear on the left-hand side of the record. Then click ‘View’. Selected SQA Report will appear.
New: To create a new SQA report, click ‘New’. And a New SQA Report’ screen will appear.
Close: To close ‘SQA Log’ screen without progressing further into incident reporting, click ‘Close’.
Ø SQA Report Screen
A Service Quality Appraisal (SQA) form should be completed at one of the following intervals:
• Every quarter
• After a major project is completed
• As required by contract or client request
The SQA form is designed to be a collaborative effort between the client and TSF representative. The results of each completed SQA form must be
discussed at the rig and district levels.
The SQA form will be given to the company’s representative on the rig. The company’s representative may fill out the form in private or in the
presence of the TSF representative as a collaborative effort. The appraisal covers the following sections:
Section 1 Health and Safety
Section 2 Operations Management
Section 3 Drilling Operations
Section 4 Marine Operations
Section 5 Equipment
Section 6 Environmental Affairs
Section 7 Catering
Section 8 Personnel
Section 9 Communications
NOTE: Details of each section should be discussed and if possible, agreed between the client and TSF representative.
Additional comments may be added in the "Comment Summary" section at the end of the form.
After the form is completed, the client representative and the TSF representative should sign and date the form.
The completed form should be forwarded to the Rig Manager for review and data processing.

60 161
A further detailed description relating to how the SQA form should be filled in can be found in the Quality Manual, HQS-QUA-002.
Ø SQA Report
Preview Print version of SQA Report. Use screen button at top of screen on the right of the print button.
Print Hardcopy of SQA Report. Use screen button at top of screen.
Ø START Card Report Log
Log of all START (See, Think, Act, Reinforce & Track) Cards relating to specific unit or location. Details of date, time and observer recorded on the
START card are detailed on the log.
View: Selects an existing START Card to view or amend. Place cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the cursor and a small (>) will appear
on the left-hand side of the record. Then click ‘View’. Selected START Card will appear.
New: To create a new START Card, click ‘New’. New blank START Card will appear.
Close: To close ‘START Cards Log’ screen without progressing further into START Card reporting, click ‘Close’.
Ø START Card Report Screen
Record START observation on START Card. (definitions below detailed in HSE Handbook: Section 4, Subsection 5.1):
Observations are recorded on a START card. The card is designed as

a tool to aid the observer in carrying out a systematic and consistent observation and to improve everyone’s observation skills.
The following are entered on the heading of the card:
• Name and Position of the observer.
• Location where the observation took place.
• Operation/Task being performed.
• Date and Time of the observation.
NOTE: No reference is made to the name of the person or persons being Observed.
In the main body of the card, tick S (safe) or U (unsafe) for the most obvious behaviors first, then use the card to systematically go through each
section to prompt observations of other behaviors or conditions. Establish the answers for the questions at the bottom of the card and mark Yes or
No as appropriate. Details of Near Hits and Serious Near Hits will be explained on the back of the START card and verbally reported to a Supervisor.
NOTE: Remember that in the majority of cases it is the behavior, i.e., the manner in which the equipment is being used that needs to be marked safe
or unsafe, not the equipment itself.
On the back of the card record the feedback given once the behavior or condition has been observed and noted. If unsafe behavior or conditions are
observed enter the reference number from the front of the card alongside the Item, i.e., 4.10, which is the reference, number for Hand Tools and add
any explanatory comments required.
Preview Print version of START card.

Print Hardcopy of START card.

61 161
Ø FOCUS Report Log
The first screen that is visible is the FOCUS Report Log. This Log provides the user with a summary of the action plans that are available for
viewing. It represents a log of all FOCUS reports related to specific unit or location. The document number, status, department name, date
submitted, target / extension completion data and title of the FOCUS report are included in the log.
View Options: Select from one of two radio buttons: View “All Reports” or “Report waiting for approval only”
Document Number: Displays the number automatically assigned to each particular Improvement / Corrective Opportunity report.
Status: Shows the status of Improvement / Corrective Opportunity action plans as: Proposal, Open, Referred, Rejected and Closed.
• Proposal: If a report has the status, “proposal” the proposal is still in the development stage and has not yet been submitted to the OIM for
approval.
• Open: If the status is ‘open,’ the proposal has been submitted to the OIM for approval.
• Referred: If the status is ‘referred’ the proposal (which was reviewed and preliminarily approved by the OIM), has been referred to the Rig
Manager for approval based on authority limits determined by Region Management.
• Rejected: If the status is ‘rejected’ the OIM or Rig Manager have not approved the proposal and have provided some comments that may need
to be addressed before resubmitting the proposal for approval.
• Closed: If the status is ‘closed’ the action plan has been completed, the lessons learned, if any identified and documented and the final actions
approved and closed out by the OIM.
Date submitted: Represents the date the Improvement / Corrective Opportunity report was submitted for approval.
Target Completion Date: Represents the date the action is proposed to be completed.
Title: Provides a brief description of the Improvement / Corrective Opportunity report.
Print Log Screen: Provides printed output of contents of the displayed log screen.
Print Current Report: Provides printed output of FOCUS report that is currently highlighted on the log screen.
View: Opens the Improvement / Corrective Opportunity report highlighted on the FOCUS report log.
Filter Report: Provides a customizable search criteria derived from the FOCUS report fields which allows a user to create a specific search that can
be used to create a custom report log or create a work list. (See instructions provided for “FOCUS Search Criteria” at end of FOCUS help file).
Close: Choose this button to close ‘FOCUS Report Log’ screen without progressing further into FOCUS reporting.
Select FOCUS ID: This button is used in conjunction with the HSE Meeting module and is not operational through FOCUS.
New: Choose this option to create a new FOCUS Report. A new blank FOCUS Report will appear.
Ø FOCUS: General Instructions

62 161
Additional assistance is available from the Corporate Management System Manual, HQS-CMS-GOV, Section 5.4 FOCUS Improvement Process.
The FOCUS Improvement process is used to formulate, organize, communicate, undertake and summarize action in a systematic and controlled
manner to improve Company performance and capture lessons learned.
The FOCUS Tracking Software supports the FOCUS Improvement process by providing the means to develop, track, follow-up and close out action
plans related to the Company management system and to provide a means to capture lessons learned from actions taken to improve the Company
Management System.
The following instructions provide a basic description of the fields used to track information related to each of the five steps of the FOCUS process:
Formulate the Plan, Organize Resources, Communicate the Plan, Undertake the Plan and finally, Summarize the Results.
The introduction and five steps are divided into 6 tabs as described above. Each tab represents one step in the process.
• Introduction
• Formulate Plan
• Organize Resources
• Communicate the Plan
• Undertake Plan
• Summarize Results
Note: All fields that are marked with * (red asterisk) are mandatory.
Ø FOCUS Report Introduction Tab

The Introduction tab provides basic information related to the proposal. Some of the fields are automatically filled in when information is filled out on
the other tabs. The introduction provides the user with a summary of the proposal details.
You will note that some of the fields in the Introduction Tab are blocked out. The following fields are populated by the subsequent FOCUS tabs or
are self-generated:
Self-Generated:: Document #, Creation Date, Installation/Facility, Region, Status
Formulate Tab: Priority, Responsible Dept
Organize Tab: Target Completion Date
Communicate Tab: Plan Approved By, Communicate Plans to Affected Parties?
Undertake Tab: Extended Target Date, Extension Date Approved By
Summarize Tab: Close Out Date, Approval and Close out by, Should Lessons learned by Shared Globally?
The first field that must be filled out before entering any data is the Type field. This field indicates whether the opportunity is “corrective” or an
“improvement.” Some data fields are unique to “type” and once the Type is selected, certain fields become available and others are blocked out.
This feature allows the user to fill out only fields that apply to a given type of opportunity saving time and preventing confusion.
Type: Select from either Corrective or Improvement Opportunity. (See description under “Corrective/Improvement Opportunity Actions” for more
information).
Initiator/Submitted By: Name of the person that identified the Improvement/Corrective Opportunity and who should be included in the formulation
of the Improvement/Corrective Opportunity plan.
Date of COA / IOA Initiation: Date the Corrective or Improvement Opportunity was first identified, e.g. audit report, etc.
Core Management Function: This field provides information on the specific management system document by department and core management
function. For example, HSE is comprised of three management functions: Health, Safety and Environment.
Policy Topic: This field is interrelated to the Core Management Function. Enter the subject specifically addressed by the FOCUS Plan. For
example, if HSE - Environment is selected, the policy topics to choose from include Containment and Handling of Hydrocarbons and Chemicals,
Drainage and Discharges, Emissions, Hydrocarbon and Chemical Spills – Response, Controlling and Reporting, Product Selection and Waste
Management – General and Product Selection and Waste Management - SOPEP.
Source of Opportunity: This field describes the basis of the Corrective or Improvement Opportunity. Example sources are: Alert – Client, Alert –
Equipment, Audit – ASA, Audit – ISM, Exemption Request, HSE Meeting, Incident Analysis Result, SMART Review - Region, SQA, THINK Plan –
MAHRA, THINK Plan – Task Risk Assessment, etc.
Corrective/Improvement Opportunity Actions: Select the type of opportunity action, either Corrective or Improvement. An opportunity action is
1) Improvement Opportunity Actions

63 161
Improvement opportunity actions are improvement measures determined by management / supervisors to maintain an existing process and/or
procedure at a required level or to improve a process and/or procedure.
a) Improvement action
An action determined by management / supervisors that is taken to improve the effectiveness of a new or existing process and/or
procedure.
2) Corrective Opportunity Actions
Corrective opportunity actions are measures determined by management / supervisors to address actual and potential causal factors in order
to prevent incidents, events, conditions or inaction from occurring or recurring.
Corrective opportunity actions are classified as:
a) Corrective (and Interim) Actions
A Corrective Action is an action determined by management / supervisors that is taken to eliminate the causes of a deficiency in order to
prevent recurrence.
Interim action is part of the corrective action taken.
An interim action is an action determined by management / supervisors that is taken to correct the deficiency but not the cause of the
deficiency until such time that the corrective action can be taken.
b) Preventive Actions
An action determined by management / supervisors that is taken to eliminate the causes of a potential deficiency in order to prevent
occurrence.
Reference to Source of Opportunity: Optional reference to enhance search functionality and report analysis. Can be used to specify Start Card #;
Incident Report #; Audit Report Type and Date; Manual Section and Subsection Information; etc.
Statement of Requirement / Existing Condition: For Corrective Opportunities, the Statement of Requirement (policy text) is included in this text
field. For Improvement Opportunities, the existing situation that is being improved upon is included in this text field. It is important to be as
descriptive and thorough as possible.
Proposal Title: A brief description that will display on the FOCUS Log. A title or heading that best summarizes the problem, e.g., “Crane Access
Ladder Change-out”
What Interim Actions are Required Until Correction Action is Implemented? This field is only available if a corrective opportunity action is
selected at the time the report is created. An Interim action is any action determined by management/supervisors that is taken to correct the
deficiency but not the cause of the deficiency until such time that the corrective action can be taken.
Ø FOCUS: Formulate the Plan Tab
Priority: (High – Medium - Low): This field is provided so that the responsible person, department head or supervisor can effectively prioritize their
action plans. Setting a priority level is not related to an approval authority. The Priority is automatically generated in the Priority field on the
Introduction tab.
Responsible Department: The department responsible for carrying out the Corrective/Improvement Opportunity. The Responsible Department is
automatically generated in the Responsible Department field on the Introduction tab.
Corrective Opportunity (Factors that may cause incidents, undesired events or conditions, or inactions to occur or recur): Corrective
Opportunities are opportunities to correct factors that cause or may cause incidents, events, conditions or inactions to occur or recur. Through
individual and source of outputs and results, corrective opportunities are identified and corrective opportunity actions determined. State the problem
as clearly as possible. This may require some brainstorming sessions with others involved in the problem solving.
Corrective or Improvement Opportunity Action (THINK): Using the THINK process, describe the plan as a result of a corrective action or
improvement action of an existing situation. (See the Corrective/Improvement Opportunity Actions heading above for more details).
Date Plan Formulated: Enter the date the plan was developed. A pop-up calendar will appear. Simply pick the date or scroll to select a different
month.
Approximate Cost Savings in USD: Optional for improvement proposals. This field is provided to assist in the approval of an improvement
opportunity action and to provide supervisors and management to quantify the savings that can be achieved in implementing an improvement
opportunity action.
Persons Involved in Formulating the Plan: Enter the individuals and their respective positions involved in the planning process. Two expandable
fields are provided. The Name field allows the user to include each member who participated in the development of the action plan. The
corresponding Position field allows the user to identify the position of each individual. The Position drop down list is quite extensive and includes all
the positions available offshore. Add as many names and positions that are involved in the development of a plan.
Ø FOCUS: Organize Resources Tab

64 161
Resources Required to Complete the Corrective / Improvement Opportunity Action: Use this text field to describe what resources are needed
or are thought to be needed to complete the plan, including equipment, materials, personnel, etc. This information will enable the user to ensure that
all resources and /or expertise are accounted for in the development and execution of the action plan.
Work Order # (if required): This field is optional and can be used in conjunction with the maintenance system if a work order needs to be
generated as part of the action plan, e.g., order of parts.
Resource or Expertise: Select from a drop down list containing: Business Process Initiative (BPI), Client, Communications, Corporate, District,
Drill Crew, Engineering, Engineering Workshop, Finance, Human Resources, Installation / Facility, IT, Marketing, Materials Coordinator, Mechanic,
Mechanic / Welder, MPI, Operations, Other, QHSE, Region, Regulatory Agency, Technical Field Support, Technology and Performance, Third Party,
Training, Vendor, and Welder. The software only allows the user to select only one Resource or Expertise. In order to select more than one
Resource or Expertise, select “Other” and enter each Resource or Expertise separated by a comma (limited to 41 characters).
Target Completion Date: The Target Completion Date is the date the Responsible Person determines will be required to complete the Corrective or
Improvement Opportunity Action Plan. The Target Completion Date is automatically generated in the Target Completion Date field on the
Introduction tab. If an extension is required, please refer to the Undertake the Plan tab.
Ø FOCUS: Communicate the Plan
Communicate the Plan to Affected Parties?: This requires choosing Yes or No. If the plan should be communicated to other parties, choose yes
and fill out the text box below.
Responsible Person for Communication: Name of person responsible for actually communicating the plan with all affected parties involved
(directly or indirectly involved in the plan execution).
Position: Position of the Responsible Person for communicating the plan.
Full Description of Communication Requirement: Include in the information where possible, who needs to be notified and what there involvement
in the plan requires (directly or indirectly). v Management of Change is utilized it should be mentioned here.
Person(s) Notified:
1) Name: Write the name of the person to be notified in the Name field.
2) Position: Select the position of the person notified from the drop down list.
3) Company: Select the company for whom the person is linked with from the drop down list provided.
4) How Notified: For each person, select from the drop-down list which communication method was used to communicate their
responsibilities. The drop-down lists includes the following: “change proposal,” “email,” “fax,” “FIRST Online,” “GRS,” “memo,” “MOC
document,” “phone,” “SMART,” “verbally” and “other.”
Waiting for Approval: This checkbox is used to submit the plan to the OIM for approval.
WARNING: After the plan has been submitted to the OIM for approval, you will not be able to change the plan or any of the fields in the
Formulate, Organize and Communicate tabs.
Delete the Proposal: This checkbox is provided in cases where the entire proposal will be removed from the system before it has been submitted to
the OIM for approval.
WARNING: If you delete the proposal, it will be completely removed from the system.
Subsequent fields under the Communicate the Plan tab are only available to the OIM/Rig Manager for filling out. Once the Plan is approved, the
first four tabs will freeze (Introduction with the exception of the target date extension, Formulate the Plan, Organize Resources and
Communicate the Plan) and the Status will remain "open" until the plan is finally closed later.
Approval
OIM Review of Plan and Confirmation of MOC Approach (Simple, Enhanced, Exemption): The OIM confirms the MOC approach is appropriate
and validates resources required to execute the plan are identified.
The Management of Change process is executed using one of three approaches: Simple, Enhanced and Exemption
To determine which approach applies to a given situation, the following questions must be answered by the person(s) involved in creating the new or
revised plan.
• Does the new or revised plan comply with the Company Management System Procedures?
• Do I/we have the knowledge to assess AND implement the new or revised plan?
• Do I/we have the experience to assess AND implement the new or revised plan?
• Do I/we posses the skills to assess AND implement the new or revised plan?
• Do I/we have the approval authority to assess AND implement the new or revised plan?
If the answer to ALL of these questions is yes, the Simple Approach may be used.

65 161
If the new or revised plan complies with the Company Management System procedures, but the knowledge, experience, skills, or approval authority
is NOT available, the Enhanced Approach must be used.
The Enhanced Approach may be used even if the Simple Approach has been determined to be acceptable, at the discretion of the personnel
performing the risk assessment.
If the new or revised plan does not comply with the Company Management System procedures, an Exemption must be requested.
See HQS-CMS-GOV, (Corporate Management System Manual) Section 5.5, Heading 4.3, “Executing the Management of Change Process”
for more detailed information.
Approve, Reject, Submit to RM: After the OIM completes an MOC, he will select one of the approval options.
Approve: The proposal is approved and is now a FOCUS Report. Once the plan is approved by the OIM, tabs 1 – 4 are frozen and changes to the
plan will not be possible. At this stage, only tab 5 Undertake the Plan and tab 6 Summarize Results, will be available.
Reject: Select the button to reject the plan. If the OIM rejects the plan, it will still be available to view from the Report log but will not be available for
data entry.
If Not Approved, Reason: The rejecting authority will describe fully the reason the plan is not approved to give the submitter enough information to
make necessary alterations to plan.
Submit to RM: If approval of the plan is outside the authority limits of the OIM, and the OIM approves the plan, he can submit the plan to the Rig
Manager for Region approval. The OIM will still need to carry out MOC and review the plan before submitting to the RM for his approval.
RM Review of Plan and Confirmation of MOC Approach (Simple, Enhanced, Exemption): The Rig Manager validates the OIM’s findings and
MOC.
See OIM Review of Plan and Confirmation of MOC Approach (Simple, Enhanced, Exemption) for more information regarding MOC and also the
Corporate Management System Manual, HQS-CMS-GOV, Section 5.5, Heading 4.3, “Executing the Management of Change Process” for more
detailed information.
Improvement Opportunity Action Plan Options
NOTE: The following two fields are only available if the plan is an “Improvement Opportunity Action.” An improvement award is optional
and not a requirement of the management system. Awards are given at the discretion of the Region. These fields are available to track an
award system if one is used.
Improvement Category: Provided as a way to classify ideas. Select from a drop-down list of categories. The category “other” is provided if a
category for the improvement is not available.
Improvement Award Level: Award level is 1, 2 or 3 depending on the idea suggested. Award level 3 is the highest and is selected by the
supervisor and is given only to ideas which are approved. Awards are given at the discretion of the Region and are not a requirement of the
Company management system.
Ø FOCUS: Undertake the Plan Tab
Add Update: Opens a new update screen for additional information to be added.
Plan Implementation Update: This text field is used to document updates to the plan, and to track tasks within the plan. This field is available only
if a plan has been approved. Information in this field should include persons involved in the plan and their roles (to be used to follow-up outstanding
tasks, etc. Examples of the type of information to capture in this field include; reasons for extension(s), feedback from expertise, updates of complex
tasks, the status of the plan, ordered parts, resources, communications, etc.
Date Updated Submitted: Select the date the update is submitted. A pop-up calendar will appear that will allow you to choose a date.
Person Submitting Update: Select a name from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is populated by the POB.
Record: The record arrow buttons allow the user to view any of the update entries that have been made to the action plan.
Submit Update: The person submitting the proposal for updating the plan. He/she would be responsible for reviewing with the approval authority
(OIM or Rig Manager).
Persons Involved in Implementation of the Plan (if required): These data fields allow for the inclusion of individuals documented in the Update
field. The fields available include both Name and Position. The Name field provides a place to enter an individual’s name while the corresponding
Position field consists of a drop-down list populated with positions within the company that the user can select from.
Request for Target Date Extension (if required): This feature is added when plans will take longer than what was originally submitted. All
requests for extension must be approved by the OIM. If the Target Date extension is not approved, the plan must be completed by the original due
date. If the due date is exceeded, the report log will indicate the plan is “overdue.” If plan is approved the target date will change to the new
extension date.
New: Use this button to create a request for an extension to complete the plan. This requires approval by the OIM.
New Target Date: Enter the new proposed date for completing and closing out the plan. Select a date from the pop-up calendar.
Responsible Department: Select from the drop-down list the department that is responsible for carrying out the plan at this stage.

66 161
New Target Date Submitted for Approval: Select the new proposed date for completing the plan.
Log of Plan Extensions: This field provides a summary of all the target date extension requests and approvals. It includes date of request and
date of approval.
Target Date Extension Approved By: The approval of an extension is provided by the OIM. The OIM selects his name from the available names
listed.
Approve / Reject buttons: Used to approve the extension date for a Corrective or Improvement Opportunity Action Plan. If extension is not
approved, the Corrective / Improvement Action plan will show as “overdue.”
Ø FOCUS: Summarize Results Tab
Describe Confirmation that Proposal Actions Closed: Provide where possible, objective evidence that the corrective / improvement Opportunity
Action plans are closed: This text field allows the user to provide a complete description that supports completion and close out of opportunity
actions.
Describe Lessons Learned: This text field is mandatory. It is used to describe any lessons learned that can be shared with the field.
Sharing lessons learned allows people and the organization to learn from experiences for applying within their department or operation.
Communicating lessons learned requires a clear understanding of what has been learned then determining who in the Company needs to know it.
Lessons learned are information, ideas and methods deemed important to achieve a successful event or to prevent future adverse incidents. By
recognizing lessons learned it allows people and the organization to learn from others’ experiences, which they can apply within their department or
operation.
As a Company it is important to recognize the opportunity to learn at the time tasks or activities are completed. These tasks and activities can be
described in two categories of events:
• Lessons Learned from successful executed task and activities.
• Lessons Learned from a failure to execute tasks and activities.
Should Lessons Learned be Shared Globally?: Select either the Yes or No radio button. A “Yes” answer mandates the OIM / Manager /
Supervisor to communicate up to appropriate people via established channels. For example: SMART, QHSE Steering Committee, Feedback, HSE
Meeting, Feedback, etc.
Person Completing Summary: This field is provided to document the person filling out the close-out summary. This field is mandatory.
Submit for Close Out: Clicking on this button will automatically request the OIM to approve the close-out summary. Once the summary is
submitted to the OIM, changes cannot be made to the summary.
Approval and Close Out By: Identified the approving authority (OIM) approving and closing out the opportunity action plan.
Close out Date: Shows date of Completion / Close Out of the Action Plan. Once a plan has been approved and closed out, it will appear on the log
as “closed”.
Ø FOCUS Print Report
Preview Print version of FOCUS Report.

Print Hardcopy of FOCUS Report.
Ø Drill Report Screen Log
Log of all Drill reports relating to specific unit or location. Details of drill date/ drill type, and drill number on the Drill Report are detailed on the log.
Print: Prints the Safety Drill Report Log in its entirety
View: Selects an existing Drill report to view or amend. Place cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the Cursor and a small (>) will appear on
the left hand side of the record. Then click ‘View’. Selected Drill Report will appear.
New: To create a new Drill Report, click ‘New’. New Drill Report will appear.
Close: To close ‘Drill Report Log’ screen without progressing further into Drill reporting, click ‘Close’.
Ø Drill Report Screen
Rig Name is automatically inserted.

Well Name: Drop down box allows selection from Wells currently available on GRS.

67 161
Drill Number: is automatically assigned by the GRS.
Date/Time: set to date the report when it is initially created. These values are editable.
Operator and Field are automatically inserted based on the selected Well name.
OIM, Snr Toolpusher, Toolpusher and Barge Supervisor can be selected using drop down boxes that appear upon placing the cursor over the cell
and clicking. Names available are those recorded in the POB report on the date the Drill report is set to.
Number of POB: Based on the date defined, the total POB recorded for that day will be returned. The cell in not write enabled. Should the POB be
changed after the completion of the drill report, click on ‘Refresh Nb of POB’ to update the total POB.
Number of Participants: click on the blue, underlined title ‘Number of Participants’ to open up the following screen:
The safety drill selection screen will contain a list of personnel onboard for the day of the drill. Tick next to each individual to confirm their attendance
at the drill. Printed output of the drill report will detail the ticked individuals as being present at the drill.
Satisfactory and Time required are filled in as required.
Drill Report Type is a predefined list available through a drop down box.
Description of Drill, Comments, Future Action/Development required are filled in as required. Detail a FOCUS item in ‘Future Action’ is
required.
Signed OIM allows the OIM to sign off, maybe adds a small comment if required and then Dates his comments.
Ø Drill Report
Preview Print version of Drill Report.
Print Hardcopy of Drill Report.
Ø HSE Meeting Report Screen Log
Log of all HSE Meeting reports relating to specific unit or location. Details of the meeting date, Dept/Crew, Rig Manager comment and meeting
number on the Meeting Report are detailed on the log.
Print: Prints the HSE Meeting Report Log in its entirety.
View: Selects an existing Report to view or amend. Place the cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the mouse and a small (>) will appear on
the left-hand side of the record. Then click ‘View’. Selected Report will appear.
New: To create a new Report, click ‘New’. HSE Meeting Report screen will appear.
Close: To close ‘HSE Meeting Report Log’ screen without progressing further, click ‘Close’.
Ø HSE Meeting Report Screen

68 161
When the report is on the screen you will notice that certain information will have defaulted from other areas of the GRS and this information is
contained in blue boxes and is unchangeable in this screen. The information you are required to enter in this report are identifiable as the white
areas.
Dept/Crew: Choose from the drop down list of crews or departments that was defined previously in the Crew Assignment Definition Screen.
Name and Title of Discussion Leader: Choose from the drop down list of names. The names will default to the personnel recorded on the POB
report as being ‘On board’ on the day of the meeting.
Persons attending meeting: This field will automatically fill after the link is clicked and the names of participants are chosen. The list of names is
generated from personnel recorded on the POB report as being ‘On board’ on the day of the meeting.
Topic discussed at HSE meeting: Only one topic per box is entered. Text field to describe a single topic discussed at the HSE Meeting.
OIM comments: OIM will add comments for each specific topic discussed, as needed.
Rig Manager Comments: Rig Manager will add comments for each specific topic discussed, as needed.
Add New Topic: This button generates a new set of input screens for entering additional topics discussed at the meeting. It will also generate input
screens for OIM and Rig Manager comments.
What HSE information (alerts, bulletins, etc.) were discussed: Text field to describe a HSE Information discussed at the HSE Meeting.
Recommended HSE improvements to be tracked by FOCUS: Only one improvement per box is entered. Text field to describe a single
improvement recommended at the HSE Meeting. Input FOCUS item if it is appropriate. Note that you can not create a FOCUS item through this
report. You must save and exit this report, go the FOCUS section, create and then fill out a FOCUS items. Returning to the HSE Meeting Report, you
will then be able to select the FOCUS item for inclusion on the report.
When Check box Ready to send is ticked, the report will be sent to the Rig Manager on the next OIM Validation of GRS. Further amendments will not
be possible unless the report is unvalidated.
Rig Manager can make comments in the report via OnLine or as Rig Manager profile on GRS-Rig. GRS-Rig will be updated with Rig Manager
comments from OnLine on the next data send from OnLine.
Add new Improvement: Generates a new set of boxes for additional improvements recommended at the meeting.
Ø Log of Incidents
Provides a printed log of the Incidents over a selected period of time.

Open screen Log of Incidents screen asking for Date from / To
When you click on the box for the date a calendar will appear choose date & okay.
Create: will take you to a preview of the Quarterly log of Incidents sheet.
Ø Log of Incidents Report
Preview Print version of Log of Incidents Report.

Print Hardcopy of Log of Incidents Report.

69 161
6. Operational Information
Ø Tubular Inventory
The Tubular inventory is the single location within GRS, which manages all Tubulars (except Riser) onboard or onshore. Information in the Tubular
Inventory is utilised in Runs (BHA’s, Bits and Pipe Tallies), Tubular Status in the Departmental Activity Report, Tubular & Riser Report and Rotating
Hours for Tubulars. Correct and current management of Tubulars in the Inventory will result in correct reporting elsewhere with in the GRS system.
Note: Serial Number, Nominal OD and OD are mandatory for an element to be saved in the Tubular Inventory.
Open screen to view the Tubular Inventory table. First you will notice that the cursor is flashing in the Equipment choice box. The inventory only for
the Equipment specified will be displayed in a table below.
Equipment: Click on Drop down menu. The drop down menu has a pre-defined list of equipment that you must choose from by clicking on the
equipment you want to look at. If information already exists for this type of equipment, it will appear in the table. If there are no Tubulars declared for
the specific equipment selected, then none will appear in the table. New Tubulars cannot be included into the Inventory without the Equipment being
first declared.
The Equipment drop down list is modifiable through the Modify List - Tubular Equipment that can be accessed by clicking on the blue underlined title
‘Equipment’.
Since version 3.0, Equipment defined as ‘Drill Pipe’ and/or has an abbreviation of ‘DP’ (not case sensitive) will not be displayed as‘Equipment’
available for selection. Should the user wish to continue tracking Drill Pipe in the Tubular Inventory, then create an equipment name such as ‘5" Drill
Pipe’ with an abbreviation of ‘5DP’.
S/N: Serial Number. This is the only mandatory field that requires to be completed for a Tubular Record to be created. A new line will appear upon a
serial number being entered. Serial number can be Alpha numeric.
Nominal OD: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Tubular Inventory
Catalogue that can be accessed by clicking on the underlined column titles ‘Nominal OD’, ‘ID’ or ‘Nominal Weight’.
OD: Enter the measured max OD of the equipment item. This may or may not be the same measurement used in the FN OD. OD is not used to
define the item of equipment in the Tubular Riser report nor in any editable Modify Lists.
ID: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. The selection available is dependent on what was declared in Nominal OD. These
drop down lists are modifiable through the Tubular Inventory Catalogue that can be accessed by clicking on the underlined column titles ‘Nominal
OD’, ‘ID’ or ‘Nominal Weight’.
Pin/Box: The equipment specific Pin and Box configuration as defined in the Equipment Modification screen will be displayed. The left column will
display the Pin/Box up thread. The right column will display the Pin/Box down thread. Thread information is available though drop down lists in each
cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Thread Modify List that can be accessed by clicking on the underlined column title ‘Pin’.
Length: Enter the make up length of the tubular as it would appear in a BHA or Pipe Tally. Do not include the Pin length.
Nominal Wt: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. The selection available is dependent on what was declared in Nominal OD
and ID. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Tubular Inventory Catalogue that can be accessed by clicking on the underlined column
titles Nominal OD, ID or Nominal Weight. The equipment specific weight configuration (wt per length or unit weight) as defined in the Equipment
Modification screen will be displayed.
Grade: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable through the Grade Modify List that can be
accessed by clicking on the underlined column title ‘Grade’.
FN OD: Fishneck OD: Enter the OD of the tubular one would expect to encounter should the tubular need to be fished from down hole. Can also be
termed as the Tool joint OD
FN ID: Fishneck ID: Enter the ID of the tubular one would expect to encounter should the tubular need to be fished from down hole. Can also be
termed as the Tool joint ID.
FN Length: Fishneck Length: Enter the length of the Fishneck section on the tubular one would expect to encounter should the tubular need to be
fished from down hole.
Location: When you click the cursor on this box you will get a drop down menu with a pre-defined list
Derrick This means the item is actually in use Ie in the BHA
Deck Located on the Rig Pipe deck ready for use in the derrick.
Other on Board Located elsewhere on the rig. Not necessarily ready for immediate use.
Repair/Rig Damaged equipment or equipment being repair still on board.
Repair/Yard Damaged equipment or equipment being repair in town.
Inspection Equipment being inspected.
Yard Equipment stored in our own yard in town
Other in Town Equipment stored in town other than in our own yard.
Owner: Click on Drop down menu, default is set to TSF, Client or Other Client as in operator items (Other possibly on loan or rented).

70 161
Last Inspection Date: When you click on the box for the date a calendar will appear choose date of the last inspection for that equipment.
PSS Code: Enter the PSS (Property Symbolization System) code for the particular equipment detailed. To find the correct PSS code, use the PSS
builder in Rig Equipment.
Delete: Place cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the cursor and a small (>) will appear on the left-hand side of the record. Click ‘Delete’
button and record will delete.
Print: Click ‘Print’ to print the Entire Tubular Inventory or the current selected Tubular Equipment.
Ø Tubular Riser Report
Rig units are required to provide to Corporate Operations on a six monthly basis a Tubular and Riser Status Report. This report is submitted on the
1st March and 1st September of the year. The report provides a complete picture of rig tubular assets on or off the rig and any movement that are
details in MMR (Material Movement Reports).
Through the careful day-to-day management of the Tubular Inventory where all tubulars are recorded in the inventory, locations are correctly noted
and MMR’s are kept for all movements or losses, GRS, through the OnLine facility, is able to provide all the necessary documentation to Corporate
operation with out the need for any further report making.
Only Tubular groups defined in the Tubular Description will be displayed in the Tubular Riser Report. It is important that the tubular groups detailed in
the Tubular Description exactly match the tubulars detailed in the Tubular Inventory. Tubular OD, ID, Wt, Thread Type and Grade must be the same
for GRS to include all tubulars recorded in the inventory in the status report. For example: In Tubular Description, grade is defined as S-135 however
in the tubular inventory grade is defined as S 135. In this case, there is no match and the tubular will not show in the Status Report.
A Tubular Riser Report runs from 1st March to 31st August and from 1st September to 28th/29th February. If the current date is 1st May, the report for 1st
March to 31st August will appear. Similarly, if the current date is 1st December, the report for 1st September to 28th February will appear. If the report
has not been created for the particular period, the user will go through a ‘create’ routine. Once the report is created, it remains available for the entire
period.
In reviewing the report, if there are anomalies with what is being reported, changes must be made in the Tubular or Riser Inventory. Reopen Status
report to review changes.
At the end of a period, GRS will request the OIM to review the report and validate the report as complete for the period. This request will only be
made during the Send Daily Data routine. Once the OIM validates the report, the status report is closed. Next time a Tubular Riser report is
requested by a user, GRS will request a new report in the next period be created. The closing value of Tubulars and Risers in the previous validated
report is inserted into the new report as the ‘Opening Balance’. If the OIM fails to validate the report, GRS will continue to ask the OIM to validate the
report every time the send daily Data routine is undertaken.
The Tubular Riser Report can be opened at any time of the day, and as many times as needs be per day. Every time the report is opened, it queries
the database so the results displayed are current.
Ø Tubular Riser Report Log
Click on Tubular Riser Report and the Tubular Riser Report Log appears.
Previous reports and the current period report are displayed.
View: Selects an existing Tubular Riser Report to view or amend. Place cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the mouse and a small (>) will
appear on the left hand side of the record. Then click ‘View’. Selected Report will appear.
New: To create a new Tubular Riser Report, click ‘New’. The following screen will appear:
Create: The user can only create a report for the applicable period the computer date is set for. If the current date is 15th April, the report for
1st March to 31st August will be created. Similarly, if the current date is 1st October, the report for 1st September to 28th February will be
created.
Cancel: Exit screen without action on screen
Close: To close Tubular Riser Report Log screen without progressing further into Tubular Riser reporting, click ‘Close’.
Ø Tubular Riser Report Screen (Drill Pipe & HWDP).

71 161
Tubular Riser Report is as follows (example shown is for Drill Pipe & HWDP):
Categories and description of the Tubulars are defined in the Tubular Description. This description must exactly match the description of the tubulars
recorded in the tubular inventory for them to be recorded in this report.
Grand Total of Premium Pipe on hand prior Period: This is carried over from the previous status report. Refer to Automatic Cross Check.
MMR (Material Movement Report): Details of any asset movements. Included receipt or transfer out of tubulars (new or from another unit), junked
or lost down hole. Under MMR #, include MMR number and reason for MMR. Positive value for receipt of tubular onto the rig. Negative value for
disposal of tubular from rig.
Premium Usable: User inserts the correct value for each Tubular Category defined and updates as necessary at any time. This has changed from
Version 2.2 where these values were derived from the Tubular Inventory.
Premium Under Repair: User inserts the correct value for each Tubular Category defined and updates as necessary at any time. This has changed
from Version 2.2 where these values were derived from the Tubular Inventory.
Grand Total of Premium Pipe: Total of tubulars assigned to the Unit (Premium Usable + Premium Under Repair).
Automatic Cross Check: This will display 0 (zero) if the report is filled in correctly. Calculated as follows:
Grand Total of Premium Pipe on hand prior Period – (Grand Total of Premium Pipe - Total MMR for period)
A zero value indicates that the difference between the numbers of tubulars available at the beginning of the report period to the number available at
the end of the period is zero. If there were any difference, this would be accounted for in the MMR section.

72 161
Ø Tubular Riser Report Screen (Drill Collars and Riser).
Tubular Riser Report is as follows (example shown is for Drill Collars):
Categories and description of the Tubulars are defined in the Tubular Description. This description must exactly match the description of the tubulars
recorded in the tubular inventory for them to be recorded in this report.
Grand Total of Premium Pipe on hand prior Period: This is carried over from the previous status report. Refer to Automatic Cross Check.
MMR (Material Movement Report): Details of any asset movements. Included receipt or transfer out of tubulars (new or from another unit), junked
or lost down hole. Under MMR #, include MMR number and reason for MMR. Positive value for receipt of tubular onto the rig. Negative value for
disposal of tubular from rig.
Premium Usable: Information taken from Tubular Inventory. Based on ‘location’ definition in Tubular Inventory.
Premium Under Repair: Information taken from Tubular Inventory. Based on ‘location’ definition in Tubular Inventory.
Grand Total of Premium Pipe: Total of tubulars assigned to the Unit (Premium Usable + Premium Under Repair).
Automatic Cross Check: This will display 0 (zero) if the report is filled in correctly. Calculated as follows:
Grand Total of Premium Pipe on hand prior Period – (Grand Total of Premium Pipe - Total MMR for period)
A zero value indicates that the difference between the numbers of tubulars available at the beginning of the report period to the number available at
the end of the period is zero. If there were any difference, this would be accounted for in the MMR section.

73 161
Ø Dynamic Positioning Monthly Report Log
Log of all Dynamic Positioning Monthly Reports relating to specific unit or location.
Print: Information detailed on the Log screen will be output to a specific printer
View: Selects an existing Dynamic Positioning Monthly Report to view or amend. Place cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the mouse and
a small (>) will appear on the left hand side of the record. Then click ‘View’. Selected Report will appear.
New: To create a new Dynamic Positioning Monthly Report, click ‘New’. A date input screen will aprear. Select a date from the calendar and click
‘OK’. New blank Dynamic Positioning Monthly Report will appear.
Close: To close Dynamic Positioning Event log screen without progressing further into Dynamic Positioning Event reporting, click ‘Close’.
Ø Dynamic Positioning Monthly Report
This is used to report DP related issues occurring on the unit.

The report is monthly and based on well locations. Should the unit change wells within the month period, then a Month Report will be created for
each well location. Each Monthly Report will be differentiated by the Month and well location selected.
Couple of notes on Report entries:
Summary of operations: Includes summary information on vessel operations for period, and includes information on any completed or pending
trials for client or Class, and any other trials originated by the vessel such as site arrival trials or blackout recovery drills.
DP Personnel Movements: This item should include permanent personnel changes such as new DP personnel, promotions, transfers and other
losses/gains.
DP equipment items: Each equipment category should include any known technical faults, modifications or upgrades, service engineer visits or
equipment replacements
Operational Goals: includes any completed or pending trials for client or Class, and any other trials originated by the vessel such as site arrival trials
or blackout recovery drills
Delete Report: Should the report be created in error and require deletion from the GRS DB, this is available as an ‘Offshore Management’ function
only. Select ‘Administration – Administration – Delete Data’ for this option. This delete function can only be undertaken if the report has not been sent
to online. Once the report is sent to Online, deletion of the report is not longer possible
Ø Dynamic Positioning Event Report Log
Log of all Dynamic Positioning Events reports relating to specific unit or location.
View: Selects an existing Dynamic Positioning Events Report to view or amend. Place cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the mouse and a
small (>) will appear on the left hand side of the record. Then click ‘View’. Selected Report will appear.
New: To create a new Dynamic Positioning Event Report, click ‘New’. New blank Dynamic Positioning Event Report will appear.
Close: To close Dynamic Positioning Event log screen without progressing further into Dynamic Positioning Event reporting, click ‘Close’.
Select for Operations Breakdown: Allows assignment of the Dynamic Positioning Event to particular unit operations declared in the Operation
Breakdown. This function is only selectable if the Dynamic Positioning Event Report was requested through the Operations Breakdown Screen.

74 161
Ø Dynamic Positioning Event Report
This is used to report any occurrence or situation that affects the ability of a Dynamically Positioned Vessel to be able to maintain acceptable position
on DP, regardless or whether the vessel was connected or was conducting other operations at the time of the DP Event. The DP Event report can be
generated either by requesting a new report or through the Operations Breakdown when the DP Event affected the Units ongoing operations.
Screen will open showing the report to be filled in by the unit.
Rig name will default as will Report #
Event Start: Date: When you click on the box for the date a calendar will appear select date.
Event Start: Time: hh:mm format.
Back on station: Date: When you click on the box for the date a calendar will appear select date.
Back on station: Time: hh:mm format.
Event Category: Choose one of the statements by clicking on the appropriate circle. Events that occur when not connected are normally reported as
Degraded status. DP Events that are associated with planned DP trials or between well planned maintenance are normally reported as Degraded
status.
Results of the events:
• Either none or from the selection of either Lost time, Disconnect or Equipment Damage.
• Record the observed/logged Max Offset Distance, the distance at Disconnect & Max Riser Angle.
Alarms Limits In Effect:
• Riser Angle Alarm, these are what the alarm set points (degrees) were at the time of the event for those vessels that have red/yellow alarm based
on riser angle
• Offset Alarm, these are what the alarm set points were at the time of the event for those vessels that have red/yellow alarm based on offset.
Initial Conditions:
• What were the weather conditions at the time? Enter in each box the weather as asked.
• DP mode: Enter one of 2 options (Auto or Manual) at the time of the Event.
Initial Equipment Online:
• DP Computers, Gyros, Position References, VRU, Riser angle: Make and type of unit and number online at time of Event
• Wind Sensors: Number online at time of Event.
• Generators/Thrusters: Click on the drop down menu and select one of 3 options Auto /Running or Unavailable at the time of the Event.
Drilling Operation: By clicking on the drilling operation box, an Edition screen will appear. Enter an account of what the drilling operations were prior
to and at the time of the event.
Sequence of Events: By clicking on the sequence of events box, an Edition screen will appear. Enter an account of what was the sequence of
operations prior to and at the time of the event.
Causes: Indicate the Primary and any secondary causes of the event. Tick the appropriate boxes as to the cause of the event.
Some Definitions:
• Computer: DP Computer
• References: Position references and DP Sensors
• Thrusters: Tunnel, Azimuth, main Props
• Generators: Power Generation from fuel to the machinery space or individual generator.
• Communication: Lack of communication or mis-communication between members of crew.
• Weather: Wind, Waves Lightning
• Electrical: Switchboards, Power Distribution, UPS
• Operator: Any member of crew or service personnel (Not just DPO)
• Procedures: Lack of procedures, poor or misleading procedures
• Maintenance: Critical equipment unavailable due to extended downtime, lack of spares, etc.
In every instance of a cause, provide an explanation in the text box below the ‘causes’ tick boxes.
Documents Included: Click in the box of the types of supporting documents that will be attached.

75 161
Corrective Actions Taken: By clicking on the corrective actions box, an Edition screen will appear. Enter an account of what immediate and long-
term corrective action was taken to prevent re-occurrence. Reference to a FOCUS action can be recorded here.
Responsible Personnel: List of personnel as defined in the POB Report on the day of the Event is available for selection. Alternatively, type in the
individual personnel details as required.
Preview Print: version of Dynamic Position Event Report: Use screen button at top of screen on the right of the print button.
Print: Hardcopy of Dynamic Position Event Report: Use screen button at top of screen.
Ø Operations Event Report
Definitions: Non Productive Time (NPT) is defined as any event caused by people, equipment, procedure or environmental conditions that
interrupts the normal course and progress of the operations.
As illustrated in Operational Event Report Process, NPT is divided between Transocean NPT, Waiting On Weather (WOW) and non-Transocean
NPT. The Transocean NPT is further sub-divided between planned NPT (preventive maintenance, other planned work stoppages) and unplanned
NPT. For the purpose of this policy, only unplanned Transocean NPT is called Down Time (DT).
WOW incurred during or as a result of a DT event will be accounted for as DT.
Non-Company NPT is sub-divided between non-productive time associated with hole problems with the well and all non-productive time for which
other parties are responsible for such as the client or 3rd Party.
The following events are NOT considered to be downtime, whatever the contractual rate:
• Planned delay of operations required to carry out scheduled preventive maintenance.

• Planned shut down of operations to carry out planned modifications to the rig or planned inspections such as SPS surveys.
• Delays while preparing for a new contract except due to equipment downtime during client acceptance testing.
• Delays due to damages to the rig as a result of operational incidents beyond Transocean’s control such as work-boat damage to the
installation or punch-through on a jack-up rig.
• Delays to operations progress due to operational difficulties beyond our control.
• Waiting on weather (WOW) except where such WOW occurs during an on-going Transocean responsible DT event.
• Waiting on client orders, equipment, materials or third parties
• Interruptions due to events beyond our control such as those caused by Force Majeure, National strikes, security disruption or governmental
orders.
• Time spent performing drills or other preventive actions.
• Time spent recovering from and investigating personal injuries or incidents.
Equipment Failures (EFR) designate short and relatively ordinary Transocean equipment related events incurring less than 3 hours of down time
and costing less than $25K to fix.
Major Equipment Failures (MEF) designate equipment failures that resulted in 3 or more hours of downtime or in equipment damage or repairs
worth $25,000 or more or which, in the opinion of the originator, are significant and worth of follow-up and/or sharing with others.
Procedural Error or Failures/To responsible (PEF) designate operational events or well problems caused by human error or procedural mistake(s)
under our responsibility. Examples of this are: fishing objects dropped in the well, pulling back a string due to an error in the assembly or recovering
a stand dropped in the derrick due to an operator error. For the purpose of clarification, fishing or string recovery operations following wash-out or
failure of Transocean owned or supplied tubular shall be reported as equipment downtime in the category drill string.

76 161
Other events include all other events such as waiting on equipment or people, security issues, strikes etc…
They are classed in:
- Other Events/Transocean responsible (OET) if they are event under our control. For ex., waiting on equipment to be supplied by Transocean or
strike of Transocean staff only.
and,
- Other Events or Well Events/Client responsible (OEC) if they are beyond our control. Example of OEC are waiting on client equipment, orders or
materials, Force Majeure event, National or general strike, security events etc…
- Finally, a new OER Type (HPR) is introduced in GRS-Rig v4.0 to report Hole Problems related NPT. Examples of HPR are well control events not
attributable to Transocean.
The reported DT hours must include all the process hours lost as a result of the event independently of the contractual rate structure. Equipment DT
must include all the hours lost and not just the time spent repairing the equipment. Non equipment DT must include all the hours spent returning to
the previously achieved point or until final abandonment of the well.
Ø Operations Event Log
Log of all Operations Events reports relating to specific unit or location.

View: Selects an existing Operations Event Report to view or amend. Place the cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the mouse and a small
(>) will appear on the left-hand side of the record. Then click ‘View’. Selected Report will appear.
New: To create a new Operations Event Report, click ‘New’. New blank Event Report will appear.
Close: To close DP Event log screen without progressing further into DP Event reporting, click ‘Close’.
Select for Operations Breakdown: Allows assignment of the Operations Event to particular unit operations declared in the Operation Breakdown.
This function is only selectable if the Event Report was requested through the Operations Breakdown Screen.
Create: Opens up the Operations Event Report
Ø Create New Operational Event Report
Report Type: you must choose a report type from the drop down list. The list is pre defined:
• EFR – Equipment Failure Report

• MEF- Major Equipment Failure
• PEF – Procedural error/Failure – Transocean Involved
• OET – Other Event – Transocean Involved
• OEC – Other Event – Client & Others Involved
Report Type can be changed at a later date.

77 161
Date: Select the date of the Event from the calendar that appears. Remember that the date on the OER MUST be on or before the first date of the
event. Operations that occur on a date can not be declared against an OER with a later date declared.
Create: Opens up the Operations Event Report
Ø OER Reporting Procedure
Refer to Operational Event Process

The Operational Events to be reported in GRS include:
• Company Equipment related events whether they resulted in down time or not; these events are divided in Equipment Failures (EFR) and Major
Equipment Failures (MEF).
• Company Non Equipment related down time classed as “Procedural Error or Failure/Company responsible” (PEF) and “Other Events/Company
responsible” (OET).
• Other non-productive time beyond the company’s control classified below:
-Hole Problems (HPR) non-productive time associated with problems in the hole beyond the company’s control
-WOW non-productive time associated with waiting on weather
-Client / 3rd Party Event which are all other non-productive time for which the company is not responsible (OEC)
A- Events having incurred No Down Time
Major Transocean Equipment Failures that incurred no DT but will cost $25K or more in repairs or replacement and other significant events which, in
the opinion of the originator, should be shared with the rest of the Company shall be reported in GRS using an Operation Event Report (OER). The
appropriate report type (MEF or PEF) shall be selected. No DT hours can be included.
B- Transocean Equipment related Down Time
All Transocean equipment related downtime must be reported in the GRS daily operation report (DOR 1) and in an Operations Event Report (OER of
either EFR or MEF type). Such events will most of the time be coded IADC code 8 but the DT can and must be recorded even if code 8 is not used (in
agreement with the client for example).
Equipment related DT is only captured in GRS if an OER is open, assigned a valid equipment type and the OER number is quoted on each of the
corresponding daily operation report line(s). This is independent of the operation, IADC or daily rate codes used and of the actual contractual
arrangement.
All the operations caused by the event must be included. In particular, WOW incurred during or following an equipment DT (BOP repair for ex.) must be
included in the equipment DT event by attaching the OER number to the relevant WOW report in the DOR 1.
C- Non Equipment related Transocean Down Time
All Transocean Non-Equipment related downtime must be reported in the GRS daily operation report (DOR 1) and in an Operations Event Report
(either PEF or OET type).
D- WOW and Client or other party responsible Non Productive Time
WOW shall be reported in the DOR 1 using the WOW code. It does not required an OER however filling in an OER is strongly encouraged whenever,
in the opinion of the reporter, the event is significant and worth sharing others in the company.
Other non productive time for which the Company bears no responsibility (i.e. HPR, OEC) must be reported in DOR 1 as either wait on client/third
parties or, as applicable and agreed with the client, as the corresponding operations (fishing for ex.). It is also mandatory that an OER is filled for these
events. GRS would only capture these events as non productive time only if an OER is properly filled.

78 161
E- Planned interruptions (PMS or SPS)
Planned interruptions shall not be reported as DT but instead be described using the appropriate code. They do not require filling an OER. Planned
maintenance in particular shall be reported using the code Planned Maintenance and IADC 7 codes. However, if the contract requires such interruption
to be coded IADC code 8 and/or to be on zero rate, it should be reported as such in the DOR1. This will not affect the Transocean internal DT record
and the corresponding period(s) will not be counted as DT.
F- Equipment related OER’s (EFR & MEF)
A single OER shall be used to capture all the DT incurred as a result of a single equipment failure. If the DT is interrupted by productive operations
before resuming for the same cause, the same OER should be used and the same number should be quoted in the DOR 1 lines corresponding to the
additional DT.
An OER must be created, a valid equipment type selected and the OER number quoted in each line reporting the DT in the DOR 1 for the DT to be
correctly accounted.
Ø Operational Event Report
Rig Name / Report Type / Report Number / Date of Event these will all default from previous information entered. Report Type can be changed at
a later date.
Report Status: This details the status of the report in the OER process. Action status from the RM on the OER can not be shown on GRS-Rig until
the rig has imported a ‘zip’ file that is sent by GRS-OnLine. This ’zip’ file will contain data that will update the status and include comments. Status
details as follows:
• Waiting for Approval: When the report is being created and before it is validated by the RM.
• Open: Validated by the RM.
• Closed: Close action undertaken by the RM
Equipment: is linked to "File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Rig Information/Rig Equipment". If you have not entered the equipment data on that list,
then you will not be able to select that particular equipment you require for the event report. Return to Rig Equipment and enter the necessary
information. Once completed, you can continue to fill out the Event Report.
When you choose the Equipment down two things may happen.
1. If this relates to one piece of equipment type then the Manufacturer /PSS# / Model # & SN will default.
2. If the info does not default it means you have more than one of this type of equipment. Then you must enter a S/N which will then bring
down the Manufacturer /PSS# & Model # .
Age since new: Enter if known or applicable
Downtime Date / Downtime Hours: If the Event report is linked to specific daily operations, the event hours will tally against those defined
operations. If the event report is not linked to specific operations, the hours will remain blank with a 0 total.. These fields cannot be user edited.
Refresh DT: In some situations there may exist a difference between what is declared in the operational breakdown in the DOR I and what is
displayed in the ‘Downtime Hours’ on the OER. In pushing this button, GRS will review all recorded Operational breakdown across all wells and sum
up the total Operational Hours against which the particular OER has been declared.
Total Time Lost: Will default using the info from the report with the updates.
Event: By clicking on the event box, an Edition screen will appear. Enter an account of what is requested.
Reasons for Event: By clicking on the reason for event box, an Edition screen will appear. Enter an account of what is requested.
Actions Taken to Correct problem: By clicking on the action taken box, an Edition screen will appear. Enter an account of what is requested.
FOCUS Action: Should the event require action through the FOCUS process, fill in the necessary information here. A FOCUS item can not be
created through this screen. The user must exit the OER and create a new FOCUS item through the QHSE section of GRS. A FOCUS action entry
will not show in an OER defined as an ERF. A FOCUS item can be retrospectively included in the OER.
Person Making Out Report: Enter a name or choose from the drop down list of names. The names will default to the personnel recorded on the
POB report as being ‘On board’ on the day of the event.

79 161
When Check box ‘Verified to send’ is ticked, the report will be sent to the Rig Manager on the next OIM Validation of GRS. Further amendments will
not be possible. If you View you have no access to adjust the report.
Insert Pictures: Graphical media can be attached to the OER. This media must be in a jpeg format and not exceed 100 Kb per item. This is to
ensure control on the DB size and to keep the data transfer ‘zip’ file to a manageable size. Click the ‘Add Picture’ button, and an ‘Open’ file screen
will appear. Select the file to include in the OER, and click ‘open’. The picture will insert into the OER.
Preview Print version of Operation Event Report

Print Hardcopy of Operation Event Report

Ø Rig Manager Review of OER's
The OER process since version 3.0 requires the review of the event by the Rig Manger. This review can be undertaken through GRS-Online or on
GRS-Rig under a Rig Manager profile.
Review by the Rig Manager on GRS-Rig will result in instant update of comments and OER Status in GRS-Rig and will update OnLine on the next
data transfer to town.
Review by the Rig Manager on OnLine will result in instant update of comments and OER status in OnLine, but will require the Rig Manager to send
a ‘zip’ data file back to the rig so that GRS-Rig can be updated.
Rig Manager Comments: Only accessible to the Rig Manager OnLine or through the Rig Manager account on GRS-Rig. Comments are not
mandatory, however if no comments, click the ‘No further comments’ box. By making comments and/or clicking ‘No further comments’ the status of
the OER will change from ‘Waiting for Approval’ to ‘Open’. Type in name, date of the review and time.
Closing OER: Only accessible to the Rig Manager OnLine or through the Rig Manager account on GRS-Rig. REA#, Comments are not mandatory.
‘No Further Action’ is ticked if the OER is closed and there is no REA or FOCUS item opened to continue the tracking of the event actions. Tick ‘OER
Closed’ box to change the status of the OER from ‘Open’ to ‘Closed’. The OER can be closed straight after making comments. Type in name, date of
the review and time.
Ø Closing of OER's
The purpose of the OER is not only to report and account for the event but also to analyze the root causes of the event, to identify what can be done to
prevent reoccurrence and to document the follow-up and corrective action. The OER shall be completed by or with the input of the on-board person(s)
competent to analyze the event. The failure and the remedial work carried out shall also be reported in the Maintenance system (EMPAC or CAMM) as
applicable.
No such report shall be considered complete and closed until all the causes of the failure and the recommended remedial actions have been identified
and listed in the OER. If the analysis work has not been done at the time the daily report is being filled and more time is needed to complete the report,
the OER should be left open until such time it can be completed as required. It is always possible to come back on and amend an OER if facts or
conclusions that should be included in the report are uncovered after a report has been submitted.

80 161
All the MEF and PEF reports must be reviewed, commented and closed by the Rig Manager. The Rig Manager is responsible to determine when an
OER can be considered as closed. An OER should be considered closed when all the required corrective action has been carried out or when the
tracking of the follow-up action is being done by an alternative mechanism. For example, an OER can be considered closed if the follow-up action is
contained in a FOCUS improvement action or a Request for Engineering Action or a warranty claim has been issued.
Closing OER: Only accessible to the Rig Manager OnLine or through the Rig Manager account on GRS-Rig. REA#, Comments are not mandatory.
‘No Further Action’ is ticked if the OER is closed and there is no REA or FOCUS item opened to continue the tracking of the event actions. Tick ‘OER
Closed’ box to change the status of the OER from ‘Open’ to ‘Closed’. The OER can be closed straight after making comments. Type in name, date of
the review and time.
Ø OER for Dual or Parallel Activity Operations
The failure of equipment used for off-line is accounted for as DT when it affects the global and not just the main line activity.
On the Enterprise Class rigs, any DT that interrupts on going activities on the secondary rotary is considered to be DT (except if the main operations
are already interrupted).
On the Express Class rigs, any DT at an auxiliary station that stops or slows down the main operation shall be reported as DT.
Ø OER Event Examples
Events having incurred No Down Time

• Premature failure of a bearing in a thruster unit due to oil contamination. No DT but the unit is unserviceable and will need to be pulled.
Failure could have been avoided if oil analysis and oil filtering equipment had been used. Open an OER, select MEF as report type and
Mooring/Station Keeping as equipment type, fill report in and submit via GRS.
• Refurbished equipment found defective upon receipt on board. Fill in an MEF OER in support of a warranty claim.
Equipment related Down Time

• The rig experiences 2.0 hrs of downtime due to the requirement to change out 2 pump liners while circulating at reduced rate as drilling
cannot continue during the repairs. Two hours of DT shall be reported in DOR 1 (Corrective Maintenance, IADC code 8, repair rate) and an
OER created (automatically suggested by GRS; type EFR, Equipment type "Mud Pumps"). The OER number shall be quoted in the DOR
line reporting the DT.
In the case where the Company Representative and Transocean OIM agree that it will not be recorded as code 8 on the IADC report but
as circulating time, the activity report may be amended to show circulation, IADC code 5, but the OER should be filled in and its number
quoted in the DOR to account for the DT.
• The bit must unexpectedly be pulled to the shoe while a mud pump module is being replaced. 3 hours are spent POOH, 4 hours waiting for
the repair to be completed and 3 hours to return to bottom. A total of 10 hours of DT shall be recorded as follows in the DOR 1:
3 hrs POH for repair, IADC code 6 changed to 8, repair rate, OER # quoted
4 hrs repair rig, IADC code 8, repair rate, OER # quoted
3 hrs RIH to bottom, IADC code 6 changed to 8, repair rate, OER# quoted
• If while the pump was being repaired, productive operations (picking up stands for ex.) are carried out as requested by the company man,
then the productive activity shall be reported in the DOR 1 and the repair time shall be reduced accordingly.
• The rig experiences a problem with the H4 Connector on a subsea BOP and it requires to secure the well and pull it to surface in 16 hours.
After correcting the problem in 12 hours the weather deteriorates and it is not possible to run the BOP for 24 hours. The weather improves
and the BOP is run and tested in 32 hours. This incident should be reported on an OER as MEF (equipment type BOP) for a total of 84 hrs
.The time waiting on weather ( WOW ) should be included with the overall DT in this instance as it resulted from the failure and need to trip
the BOP.
• A workboat hits and damages a rig column; the operations are stopped for the time necessary to inspect the column and do emergency
repairs. Because this collision is considered to be beyond our control, the time spent doing so shall NOT be considered DT and be
reported in the DOR1 as Waiting on Other; A OEC OER should be prepared.

81 161
Non Equipment related Down Time

• The derrick man is transferring mud between the mud pits and accidentally opens the wrong valve and dumps 450 bbls of water-based
mud overboard. It requires that operations halt to allow mud volume to be built in 6 hrs to allow drilling to proceed. This incident should be
reported on GRS as Waiting on Transocean. An incident report (PEF) shall also be filled in.
• The pipe handler operator makes an operating mistake and drops a stand of pipe. The time spent resolving this problem shall be reported
as Waiting on Transocean Personnel and not as equipment DT. The OER relating the event shall be classed as PEF.
Client or other responsible Non Productive Time

• 2 hours are spent waiting on a logging tool to continue the operations. This should be reported in the DOR 1 as waiting on client. No OER
required.
• 3 days are spent in fishing operations as the result of the introduction of a new tool that failed. The lesson can be shared with the rest of
the company by filling in an OER (HPR). The operations reported are the actual fishing operations and are recorded as NPT (not DT) in the
GRS statistics.
• 42 hours are spent pulling legs on a jack-up. The contract has a 24 hour limitation after which repair or zero rate applies. This is NOT
considered DT. Report in DOR as normal operations, IADC code 23 "moving" and adjust rate as required. If client requires this to be
reported as IADC code 8, this can be done without effecting the Transocean DT record.
Planned Interruptions
• The BOP inspection and PM planned between wells cannot be completed in time as a result of a very short field move. 5 hours are spent
waiting for the stack to be ready. Assuming no other productive operations could be performed during this time, 5 hours of Preventive
Maintenance (IADC code 7) shall be reported in the DOR 1. The code Wait on Transocean equipment shall not be used as it would results
in the recording of non-equipment related DT.
• The contract requires a zero rate for any interruption including routine PM. Set the GRS rate table to match "zero rate" to any IADC code 7
operation and report all TDS lubrication, drill line slip and cut as IADC 7, planned maintenance. These hours will not be counted as DT and
the rate sheet will accrue correctly.

82 161
Ø Operational Event Report Process
NPT
Operational Event
Transocean Waiting On Non

Weather (WOW) Transocean
NPT
NPT
Client/3rd
Party
NPT
Examples:
+ Waiting on client orders
DOWN TIME waiting on client or 3rd party
material or equipment
+ National Strike
Planned
Unplanned + Interruption of operation
Examples: due to security or community
+ service TDS issues
+ Slip & cut DL Equipment + Time lost as a result of
+ wailting on Failure
BOP's while Examples:
performing + failure of eqt resulting
scheduled PM on DT on the critical path
+ inspecting + operations resulting
the TDS shaft Hole
from in-hole failure of
+ testing eqt or Problems
To tubular (wash-out or
performing full break) NPT
planned eqt + failure of off-line eqt
checks affecting parallel opera-
+ safety Examples:
tions.
stand-off + Well Control events
Procedure or + Stuck Pipe or

Operational + Other well events not
Examples:
+ Fishing operations to
fish eqt dropped in hole
by Transocean personnel
+ lost time recovering
a stand of pipe dropped
due to operator error.
+ time spent making mud
with ops interruped
following accidental mud
loss under To control.
Other event
under TO control
Examples:
+ strike of Transocean
personnel

83 161
Ø Down Time Summary and Rate summary
The OIM (Offshore Installation Manager) and the Rig Manager shall use the GRS NPT summary report on a regular –preferably weekly- basis to
ensure that all the NPT incurred during the period has been correctly reported in GRS.
The NPT and DT summary captures technical information that is different from the Rate sheet; the total DT does not necessarily correspond to the
loss of revenue. Both sets of information are different and must be maintained independently.
Ø NPT Summary Report
File Path: GRS Rig / Rig selected/Operational Information/ NPT Summary Report
Open screen and New Weekly downtime summary Report screen appears.
Date from/to: Select the NPT review period with dates ‘from’ and ‘to’ using the calendar that appears.
Subcategory: Click ‘Subcategory’ for the NPT Summary Report to display events according to the Equipment Subcategory.
Create: Opens up the New Weekly downtime summary Report

NPT Summary Report is generated through Crystal Reports. A hardcopy can be made if required by clicking on printer icon at top of screen. To Exit
click ‘X’ top right hand corner.
Total Mechanical: All events that are classified as EFR or MEF and contain hours linked from the operational breakdown.
Procedural Failure DT: All events that are classified as PEF and contain hours linked from the operational breakdown.
Other DT: All events that are classified as OET and contain hours linked from the operational breakdown.
Planned NPT: All operations that have a primary code of ‘Preventative Maintenance’, but no link to an OER (i.e.: no OER number in the event
column of the Operations Breakdown ). On dual activity units, this only applies to ‘Main’ activities.
WOW: All operations detailed with secondary code as ‘Wait on Weather’ and NOT linked to an OER.
WOW (Included in Transocean NPT): All operations detailed with secondary code as ‘Wait on Weather’ and linked to an OER.
Wait on Client/Others: All events that are classified as OEC and contain hours linked from the operational breakdown.
Hole Problems All events that are classified as HPR and contain hours linked from the operational breakdown.
Ø Rig Rate Report Log
File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Operational Information/ Rig Rates Report
View: Selects an existing Rig Rates Report to view or amend. Place cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the mouse and a small (>) will
appear on the left-hand side of the record. Then click ‘View’. Selected Report will appear.
New: To create a new Rig Rate Report, click ‘New’. New Rig Rate Report Screen appear.
Close: To close the report log screen without progressing further into the report, click ‘Close’.

84 161
Ø New Rig Rate Report Screen
Date: Select the date ‘to’. Select date from calendar (Note the date you choose will default to the month end date). Rig Rate Report will always
report for an entire calendar month period. If there are two wells reported in one month, two Rig Rate reports will be generated for each well.
Create: Opens up the Rig Rate Report (A well must have been created to get a report)
Ø Rig Rate Report
Report appears on the screen showing the hours reported in the Daily Operations Report. It shows the main Contractual rates Operating / Standby /
Repair / Other ( Note: "Other" covers all the other rates you may have created in File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Rig Information/ Rates & Codes).
The only part of this Report you can enter information in is the Remarks column. Also the For TSF & Date For Client & Date at the bottom of the
screen can be filled in.
Remarks: This is optional to make a brief reference relating to the day selected.
To Print report select print icon at top of screen and a dialogue box will appear stating "The report will be saved before being edited with MS Word,
Do you wish to continue".
No will go back to the GRS.
Yes and a dialogue box will appear, "Rig Rate Report Progress" showing a open word and scrolling bar progress status. This will complete and
disappear and the "Save as –Rig Rate Report" dialogue box will appear. To save file then select which file you want to save it in and click save. The
word file will open automatically and you print as you would a normal word Document. To return to GRS, close the MS Word file.
Ø Weekly Drill Report Log
View: Selects an existing Report to view or amend. Place the cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the mouse and a small (>) will appear on
the left-hand side of the record. Then click ‘View’. Selected Report will appear.
New: To create a new Report, click ‘New’. New Weekly Drill Report screen will appear.
Close: To close the report log screen without progressing further into the report, click ‘Close’.
Ø New Weekly Drill Report
Date: Select the date ‘to’ from the calendar that appears. (Note the date you choose will default to the Sunday after your choice of day i.e. if you
select Mon 10th the date will default to Sun 16th.
Create: Opens up the New Weekly Drill Report

85 161
Ø Weekly Drill Report
When the report is on the screen you will see a report and you will notice that certain information will have defaulted from other areas of the GRS and
this information is contained in blue boxes and is unchangeable in this screen. The information you are required to enter in this report are identifiable
as the white areas.
Master / Barge Supv. : Enter a name or choose from the drop down list of names. The names will default to the personnel recorded on the POB
report as being ‘On board’ on the day of the drill.
Drill Reports: Drills recorded under the ‘Safety Drill Report’ section of GRS for the period of the report will automatically be displayed.
Response Team Training: Enter total hours spent on the Drills completed this week.
Description: For a brief account of the Response Team Training.
Emergency Drill Details: Drills recorded under the ‘Safety Drill Report’ section of GRS for the period of the report will automatically be displayed.
Systems / Equipment Evaluation: Fill in the information as required for each System / Equipment which are in blue boxes and are defined list and
unchangeable.
Date Tested or Inspected: Select the date from the calendar that appears
Adequate: Enter as required
Defective: Enter as required
Reviewed by OIM: Enter a name or choose from the drop down list of names. . The names will default to the personnel recorded on the POB report
as being ‘On board’ on the day of the drill.
Date: Select the date from the calendar that appears.
Print: Hardcopy of Weekly Drill Report: Use print icon button at top of screen.
Ø Running Hours for Tubulars
Calculates (from Operational Reporting) rotating hours only for all equipment recorded in the Tubular Inventory and which are declared in any BHA.
You must enter into the Initial cumulative Hours Box (white). This will be the hours on the equipment at present. Should the equipment be re-
inspected, then the Initial Cumulative Hours will have to be changed to zero so the hour maybe tracked correctly.
Recompute: Calculates (from Operational Reporting) rotating hours for all equipment used in any BHA. The rotating hours statement will display
results from last GRS computation. If a new BHA has been declared and operational rotating hours assigned against it, click ‘Recompute’ to include
these new elements and the hours assigned against them.
Print: Hardcopy of Report: Use print icon button at top of screen.

86 161
Ø Products Database
This screen defines the Products that the rig wishes to record an inventory for specific reasons i.e. Safety, Rig Stability, Legislative.
Product: If you click on the drop down menu then a predefined list will appear select as required. If the list does not have what you require then you
must click on the word Products underlined & in blue for the Modify List - Products to appear.
Product Type: A drop down menu will only give you a predefined list of 3 items Liquid / Gas / Solid select as required.
Product Unit: A drop down menu will give you a list to select from this list is dependent on what product type chosen will determine what is on this
list. Go to GRS-Tree: Administration to Change Units available.
Rig / Mud: Drop down menu, select Mud or Rig.
• Mud indicates the product is generally used as a mud system consumable and is available to be recorded in the Mud Report. The same product
will also be available to be recorded in the units Marine Report should the ‘Show in Marine Report’ be selected as ‘Yes’.
• Rig indicates the product is used as a Rig consumable. The product will only be available to be recorded in the units Marine report.
Show in Marine Report: Drop down menu, select Yes or No. Gives you the option to put certain important Products to the rig in the Daily reports so
all can track & logistics. If Mud had been previously selected, then you have the choice of either Yes or No to include the product in the Marine
report. If Rig had been previously selected, then Yes is the default.
Delete: Place cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the mouse and a small (>) will appear on the left-hand side of the record. Click ‘Delete
line’ button and selection will delete.

87 161
7. Daily Reports
Ø Daily Reports
Select a daily report by clicking on any of the dates presented. GRS will display the last ten days from the current date as set in the computer. To
select a day previous to the last 10 days, click on Other Days which will bring up a separate window.
Having selected the date the file tree will open to show you 3 available Reports:
POB Report
Marine Report
Departmental Activity Report
Ø POB Report
The POB report is a tool to track the movement of personnel on & off the rig, manage room & bed assignments and manage lifeboat & fire team
assignments.
The Report is split into 3 sections:
• Personnel On Board
• Personnel Arrived
• Personnel Departed
Management of the POB report is achieved through the Personnel Arrived and Personnel Departed sections only. In the Personnel on Board
section, there is the ability to change number of fields, however Insertion and Deletion of personnel will not be possible. Fields that cannot be
amended in the Personnel on Board section are Last Name, First Name, DOB and Category.
Personnel Arrived: If the personnel arrived has been recorded in the Personnel Database, their name will be available using the drop down menu.
Click on the drop down and the Last Name, First Name, DOB and Personnel Number will be displayed for all available employees. Click on an
employee and all information from the Personnel Database will be pulled into the Personnel Arrived section.
If the arriving personnel are not recorded in the Personnel Database, they must be added (minimum entry is First Name, Last Name, DOB and
Category) before they can be arrived.
Note: Available printer shown on Print Screen is the default system printer, but other printers can be selected from this window as well. Define
default system printer though Printer settings in the Windows Control Panel.
attachment.
Ø Personnel Arrived
Last Name: Click in the field box. A drop down arrow will appear to select an individual from the drop down. If the user already knows the name of
the employee, this process can be streamlined by typing the last name for this person into the field. All of the information below comes directly from
the employee’s Personnel Database record.
First Name: If you have selected the individual through the Last Name field, then this field should be automatically filled out if it was correctly
included in the Personnel Database.
DOB: If you have selected the individual through the Last Name field, then this field should be automatically filled out if it was correctly included in
the Personnel Database
Category: If you have selected the individual through the Last Name field, then this field should be automatically filled out if it was correctly included
in the Personnel Database.
Nationality: If you have selected the individual through the Last Name field, then this field should be
automatically filled out if it was correctly included in the Personnel Database
Position: If you have selected the individual through the Last Name field, then this field should be automatically filled out if it was correctly included

88 161
Company: If you have selected the individual through the Last Name field, then this field should be automatically filled out if it was correctly included
Rig Specific #: If you have selected the individual through the Last Name field, then this field should be automatically filled out if it was correctly
included in the Personnel Database.
Room #: If you have selected the individual through the Last Name field, then this field should be automatically filled out if it was correctly included in
the Personnel Database.
Lifeboat: Information will enter upon the definition of the Room Bed #. Information is modifiable only through the Rooms Database .
Boat/Chopper#: Enter the Boat name or Chopper number and arrival time for the first employee. This value will automatically carry down for each
consecutive employee. If there is a later boat/flight (i.e. Crew Change) enter the first arriving employee, change Boat/Chopper number (as required)
and arrival time as above and this will carry for each member on the new boat/flight.
Ø Personnel Departed
The personnel who are defined as being already on board will be the only selection available to depart from the installation.
Last Name: Click in the field box. A drop down arrow will appear with selection of individuals defined as being already on board the unit. Select
individual from the drop down.
All other fields will automatically fill out based on the information recorded on the Personnel Onboard section of the current POB report.
Boat/Chopper#: Enter the Boat name or Chopper number and departure time for the first employee. This value will automatically carry down for
each consecutive employee. If there is a later boat/flight (i.e. Crew Change) enter the first arriving employee, change Boat/Chopper number (as
required) and departure time as above and this will carry for each member on the new boat/flight.
Ø Personnel On Board
Management of the POB report is achieved through the Personnel Arrived and Personnel Departed sections only. In the Personnel on Board
section, there is the ability to change a number of fields, however Insertion and Deletion of personnel will not be possible. This information comes
from the person’s individual record in the Personnel Database, but it is important to remember that any change to the POB will not be reflected in
the Personnel Database. In order to update fields that cannot be edited, the change must be made in the Personnel Database and the employee
must be departed and arrived again.
Last Name, First Name, DOB and Category: These fields have been defined through Personnel arrived. If a person’s Category has been changed
in the Personnel Database after they arrived, double-clicking in this field will prompt the user to update this field. Click OK to accept the update,
Cancel to leave it as-is.
Nationality: The user has the ability to select a different Nationality from the dropdown in the event the entry made in the
Personnel Database is incorrect, but a change here will not update the Personnel Database information. The menu is predefined
and cannot be edited.
Position: The user has the ability to select a different Position from the dropdown in the event the entry made in the Personnel
Database is incorrect or he has been promoted, but a change here will not update the Personnel Database information. The menu
is predefined and cannot be edited.
Company: The user has the ability to select a different Company from the dropdown in the event the entry made in the Personnel
Database is incorrect, but a change here will not update the Personnel Database information. The menu is predefined but you can
add to through a Modify List - Company, which you can enter by clicking the cursor on the underlined words above the
appropriate columns.
Personnel #: This is a box is for a number can be employee number but in some areas in the world you maybe required to record a legislative
number and this box may be used for this. The title of the column can not be amended.
Room #: Information is available though drop down lists in each cell. These drop down lists are modifiable only through the Rooms Database {File
Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Rig Information/Rooms Database}. Only items on the drop down list are allowed in the cell.
Lifeboat: Information will enter upon the definition of the Room Bed #. Information is modifiable only through the Rooms Database .
Primary/Secondary Response Team: Update Response Team if applicable.
Date arrived: The POB report will recognize arrival date through the Personnel Arrived section. Amendment, if required, can be achieved through
left clicking on the field box and selecting the appropriate date from the calendar.

89 161
Days: The POB report will recognize days on the rig through the Personnel Arrived section. The date or arrival will account for ‘1 day’ on the rig.
Date of departure will not contribute to days on the rig. Amendment, if required, can be achieved through clicking on the field box and updating the
value.
Tour #: The system assumes that all people everyday work 12 hours. It allows the appropriate assignment of personnel to the right crews so that the
IADC report will correctly report. Select ‘N’ (night: generally 00:00 to 12:00 or 18:00 to 06:00 shift) or ‘D’ (day: generally 12:00 to 24:00 or 06:00 to
18:00)
Rot. #: On Enterprise-class rigs, this differentiates between the Fore and Aft rotary for Drill Crew personnel.
Work Hours: Is an accumulative total of hours worked on the rig by that person for the particular day. On two tour rigs, the value will default to 12
hours, although it can be changed in each person’s Personnel Database record. On three tour rigs, the value will default to 8 hours. This figure can
and should be updated to reflect any over or under time such that correct hours can be recorded for the TRIR.
Note: This has links to the TRIR (Total Recordable Incident Recording) so it can compute its figures. File Path: GRS rig / Rig Information / TRIR
Initialisation.
Evac Priority: Fixed list: Level 1 to Level 5. Level 5 is the first to leave. Level 1 is last to leave. This information is allows the generation of
Emergency Evacuation Report
Crew: Use the dropdown to update or change the employee’s crew. Crews are defined in Crew Assignment Definition {File Path: GRS rig / Rig
selected/Rig Information/Crew Assignment}.
Ø Hourly Payroll
The Payroll sheet allows the rig to track working hours and distribute them among the different categories involved in the Payroll process: REG or
CLT on a Daily basis, ST or OT for the total of the Period.
The Payroll timesheets are automatically generated for a selected Crew and a selected Period from the information recorded in the daily POB
reports. The only action required to manage the timesheet in GRS-Rig is the distribution of the POB Daily working hours in the relevant categories.
Clicking on Hourly Payroll will open a selection screen. User first selects the relevant Crew for the Timesheet to generate.
The next step consist in selecting the date limits of the reporting period. A report can cover a period no longer than 7 days. A new report created for a
given crew will always start after the end date of a previous report for the same crew. No overlapping is allowed.
- If this is the first timesheet for this crew, user can select both Date From and Date To (1).
- For any later report, the Date To field is restricted to any date after Date To of the last existing Timesheet.
- If the report for this crew and day is already existing, it will be automatically selected to open (2).
Click on Create or Open to open the Report.
The Timesheet has been designed to minimize user input and retrieve all possible information from existing POB Report. It is basically made of 2
tables:
Daily Hours: Total per Day = POB Working Hours. Hours can be distributed in REG/CLT
Total Hours: Total of the week can be distributed among ST or OT
Timesheet Validation
At the end of a reporting period, an “Offshore Management” user will have to Validate the timesheet with the Validation button shown at the bottom of
the sheet. Once Validated, information will be sent to GRS-OnLine in the next data file. Once Sent, the timesheet can NO LONGER be modified.
The Crew members are supposed to be able to sign a printed copy of the Timesheet once it has been validated.
Tips
- Hourly Paid personnel have to be recorded in the Personnel Record in the Personnel Database. The Hourly Paid check box is available only for
Transocean National personnel. The next time the individual will arrive on board, he/she will be automatically identified as Hourly Paid and listed in
the next Timesheet for his/her crew.
- If the individual is already OnBoard the Rig, you should use the “Refresh Personnel data” in the POB Report to update his/her status.
- Hourly Paid personnel should also have their Employee number recorded the same way or a warning message will be displayed each time you
open the Hourly Payroll timesheet.
- If for any reason a crew member has to leave the rig before the end of the reporting period, he will sign the printed copy of the current status of the
timesheet, even if not yet validated.
Timekeeper/Reviewer: These drop-down menus allow for the selection of employees who will perform these tasks. This list is made up from the
POB; consequently only those employees currently on board will show up in the list.
Report Ready to Send: Check this box when the Payroll data is complete and it will be sent with the Daily Reports.

90 161
File Export: Creation of a ‘Hourly Payroll’ through Crystal Reports can also create a file (or digital) version of the report. This digital version can then
be sent onwards as an E Mail attachment.
Ø POB Summary
Clicking on the POB Summary folder will present three options through Crystal Reports – POB Summary, Arrival and Departure Report and Empty
Beds Report.
POB Summary: This report is taken from the POB Report and is sorted alphabetically by Category, then alphabetically by Last name. It lists the
personnel on board and displays Last name, First name, Nationality, Position, Personnel Number, Room Number, Pri/Sec Escape and Date Arrived.
Arrival and Departure Report: This report is taken from the appropriate sections of the POB Report and alphabetically lists all arrivals and
departures for the day selected. It is a quick reference tool and does not include all of the fields available from the POB Report. For a detailed
listing/printout, refer to topic "POB Report".
Empty Beds Report: This will provide a numerically ascending listing of all empty beds on the rig and their associated Primary/Secondary Escapes,
which may prove useful during scheduled maintenance tasks in the Accommodations or general room assignments. Escape definitions are assigned
in the Rooms Database {File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Rig Information/Rooms Database}.
Note: Available printer shown on Print Screen is the default system printer, but other printers can be selected from this window as well. Define
default system printer though Printer settings in the Windows Control Panel.
attachment.
Ø Muster Lists
Clicking on Muster Lists will present a pop-up window where the user can select between:
Lifeboat Muster List
Response Team Muster List
Emergency Evacuation Report
The list is further refined by a drop down list which will allow sorting by Last Name, Company, Position or Bed. Selecting Ascending or Descending
will sort the report appropriately.

91 161
Ø Marine Report
Stability:
Draft: Enter as per defined units.
VDL (Vertical Deck Loading): Enter as per defined units
VCG (Vertical Centre of Gravity): Enter as per defined units
GM (): Enter as per defined units
With position, Heading and Risers, there is the ability to input multiple records based which are differentiated between each other by time. Once a
line is complete, clicking ‘Add’ will present a new line for data entry.
Position:
Time: enter time of observation.
Latitude: Enter in degrees, minutes and seconds.
Longitude: Enter in degrees, minutes and seconds..
Speed: If the unit is on tow, enter value in knots only. If the unit is stationary on location then speed = 0.
Heading & Motion:

Rig Heading: Enter direction.
Heave: Enter as per defined units
Pitch: Enter in degrees
Roll: Enter in degrees
Risers:
Rotary Table: This is for the benefit of the Dual Activity Enterprise class units. Enterprise class can define the Riser as being on the ‘Forward’ or ‘Aft’
rotary. All other rigs default with ‘Rotary’.
Flex joint Ang.: Enter Flex joint angle Enter in degrees
Flex Jnt Dir : Enter Flex Jnt direction. Enter in degrees
Nb RT’S: (Number of riser tensioners). Enter the number of tensioners used on the riser.
Riser Tension: Enter the total riser tension applied to the riser, as pe rthe defined units.
Anchors: Spaces available for 12 anchors. Fill out as required.

• Ave. Tension: Enter as per defined units for each identified mooring point.
• Max Tension: Enter as per defined units for each identified mooring point.
• Chain Out: Enter as per defined units for each identified mooring point.
Vessel and Helicopter Movement: You will able in this area log as many Helicopter & boats the vessel receives any day.
Standby Vessel: Enter the Vessels name here.
Helicopters: Name: Usually its ‘call sign’ but you may call it another name.
Arrived: Enter time of arrival on board hh: mm.
Departed: Enter time departed from the vessel hh: mm.
Boats: Name: Vessels name
Arrived: Enter time of arrival hh: mm.
Departed: Enter time-departed hh: mm.
In both Helicopter and Boats when you enter Name & Time arrived you will see that space for a new entry appears below to allow you to enter
another.

93 161
Machinery Hour: This area is to record the operating hours of up to 8 Thrusters. Top line is for the total thruster operating hours in a 24 hour period.
The bottom is the total hours based on the previous days report total. Should there be an error with the total, the user can write over the value with
the correct value.
Enter as a number up to 2 decimal places if required.
Weather: In this area enter the weather, as the vessel would normally record it. Firstly choose the 3 times of day you wish to record the weather
Enter time hh: mm in spaces provided then fill in the data in the areas provided in the defined units as required.
Position Information: For Semi Subs and Drill ships. Enter the vessels Offset From Wellhead information Distance & Direction (in defined units).
Leg Loads and Penetration: For Jackups. Detail the leg description against the number. Max of 4 legs available for definition (i.e. Fwd, Port Aft,
Starb Aft). Enter each legs load and penetration into the seabed (in defined units).
Personnel On Board: This Information will automatically default from the POB Report
Bulks: Refer to Bulk Section
Ø Bulk Section
Bulks links back to Product Database File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Operational Information/Products Database in which you
have chosen certain products to be shown in the Marine Report. So to enter the data by clicking the cursor on the underlined blue
word Bulks and "Bulks Input screen" will appear.
Bulks Input: The Products will be listed that you selected in the Products Database and you indicated Yes to be on the Marine report. Initially you
will have to using the drop down menu in the Product column to select the items you report as being on board and you will have to enter them as
received. After the initial set-up, the stock will be managed by the Received / Return / Rig Used fields (all white boxes) should be followed to give
the correct totals. Today closing inventory will be tomorrows starting inventory. Once the product is chosen in the future reports the product will be
colored blue. You may choose other items using the white box at the bottom of the list and the drop down menu. All products requiring display must
have been defined in the Products Database before they can be selected.
Cylinder Input: Works in the same method as Bulks input except there is an additional Start and closing field to account for bottles as being empty
or full.

94 161
Delete: click the cursor on the line you wish to delete then, click delete button, line will delete.
Add: This button automatically makes the cursor jump to the place to select a new entry.

Ø Department Activity Report
Rig Name / Date: Will both default. You will then see a list of Departments that you defined in File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Rig Information
/Department Configuration.
Department: You are required to click the mouse on the white area below the ‘Department Name’ and an Edition screen will appear. In the edition
screen, type information related to your craft as outlined by your Supervisor. Once comments are entered you may choose to Spell Check, Cancel
the entry or OK to save it to the DAR.
For example this could be what you achieved yesterday and what you propose to do today. This is not an operational report that is made
elsewhere).
Equipment down: You are required to click the mouse on the white area below the heading ‘Equipment Down’ and an Edition screen will appear. In
the edition screen, type in what you relevant comments you wish to make about the equipment that is down. This is equipment worth mentioning but
is not effecting operations. Operational equipment that is down will be in the operational event report. Report File path: GRS rig / Rig
selected/Operational Information /Operational Event Report-DT(Downtime).
Policy and Procedure Feedback: Policy and Procedure Feedback system was implemented in GRS Version 3.0 so that issuance, receival and action
of Policies and procedure could be followed through. This feedback register provides the ability to verify, by the region or Corporate, that the
implementation of the P&P has taken place.
Should a particular policy, procedure or alert be received on the rig unit, record the document in the following manner:
Identifying #: Record the document specific number here
Opened/Closed (N/A)
Opened: Document received on the rig, and action defined in the document has not started or is in progress.
Closed: Document received on the rig, and action has been completed or action is not applicable to rig unit.
Comment: Make limited comments about document and status on the rig.
Warehouse Last 24hrs: Note this information is required in USD $ (United States Dollars). Also note this is
a daily amount:
Issues: Enter amount to 2 decimal places.
Receipts: Enter amount to 2 decimal places.
Inventory Value: The box is blue blocked so you cannot alter the figure. The amount it automatically works out is Receipts minus Issues and
displays that figure.
Tubulars: This is a status of Tubulars that has been defined as in the Tubular Description under the Rig Information section. The Equipment will be
listed alphabetically, followed by OD. It will show the reader what is On Board and what is in Town, the Total, and who owns it.
All this information is blue write protected and you cannot be altered. Amendments to the type of tubulars being represented can be undertaken
through Tubular Description. Amendments to the number of tubulars and their location can be undertaken through the Tubular Inventory. However
you may write a concise comment in the white box on the right of each piece of equipment by clicking on the appropriate box and typing. The Spell
Check button operates on the "Tubulars" comment section only.


95 161
Ø Other Days
Click folder and the screen ‘Rig Other Day’ appears.
Select a Date: Click the cursor on the white box and select a date from the calendar.
Here you can view a selected Daily report. First you must select by clicking the radio button to select:
• POB Report
• POB Summary
• Arrival and Departure Report
• Empty Beds Report
• Lifeboat Muster List
• Response Team Report
• Emergency Evacuation Report
• Marine Report
• Hourly Payroll
View: Button gets you to the report you selected.
Cancel: Exits the screen.

96 161
8. New Well
Ø New Well
In navigation section, click on the words New well and a Create New Well ‘wizard’ screen will appear. Follow the wizard through the following
screens to be able to provide the minimal information necessary to create a new well in GRS.
Create New Well
Minimum Well Information
Rig Move Information
…..information from the Create New Well Wizard goes automatically in to Well Information.
Ø Create New Well
Click on the words New Well and a Create New Well ‘wizard’ screen will appear.
Sidetrack: A sidetrack well generally has the same information of the ‘parent well’ such as water depth, RKB to Well head, latitude & Longitude, etc.
Should the new well be a side track from an existing well within the GRS-Rig DB, by clicking on the ‘Sidetrack’ check box, the tick boxes to carry over
information from the previously defined well will automatically be selected.
For more information, refer to Sidetrack.
Carry Over Information from an Existing Well: This screen will ask if particular information from a previous well is required to be transferred
across and utilized in the new well. Click in the white box and a drop down menu will appear with previous well that are resident in the GRS database
and have not been deleted or archived.
If you do choose a well to carry information from then you will get the choice to click the cursor in the tick boxes on the right. Choose one or all from
the list;
• Well Information
• Sections Descriptions
• Forecast-Incentive
• Lithology
…once this is done click Next >>
But if you have no old wells to choose from or you do not want to carry Information over the click ‘ Next >>’
Cancel: Exits screen without saving Data.

97 161
Ø Sidetrack
Since GRS Version 3.0, there is a new feature which gives consideration to the operation of a Sidetrack and its relationship to a ‘parent’ well. In most
parts, the well information of the ‘parent’ well is the same for the sidetrack. The following facilities are available in GRS for Sidetracks.
All sidetracks can have a name change: GRS treats a sidetrack as a ‘new’ well, however assigns most of the attributes of the ‘parent’ well to the ‘new’
well.
· Sidetrack can be linked to the parent well, whether on not there have been Operations recorded against the parent well. The links can be
continued through to the end of well report, performance comparison where the ST can be considered as part of the parent well or separate items.
· Where possible, a sidetrack should incorporate the name of the parent well.
· Sidetracks can be closed and deleted independent of the Parent well.
· Section, run & bit numbering can be based on the existing parent well numbering or on a standalone numbering. Section and run sidetrack
can continue section and runs numbers from the previous well or can have its own run section & run declaration ( i.e: start at section 0, run 0).
· Bit re-run numbering can be based on the existing parent well numbering or on a standalone numbering.
· A sidetrack can be declared a ‘tight hole’ while the parent may not be ‘tight hole’. Refer to Tight Hole
· A sidetrack can follow on from another sidetrack as long as they are both below the same parent well.
Ø Minimum Well Information
Note the words with * next to them indicate that that info must be filled in.
Well Name: Enter the well name as per Operator. Can be altered at a later date.
Operator: Choose the operator’s name from the drop down menu. If the operator’s name is not on the drop down list then you must click on the
underlined word Operator and a Modify-List - Operator will appear.
Country: Choose the country from the drop down menu. The country selection is pre-defined based on the Region within which the unit has been
set. Refer to Rig Identification. This selection cannot be altered.
Field Name: Enter the field name as per Operator designation.
Start Date: Click on the white box for the date and select the date from calendar that appears. Start date is generally defined and when the unit
officially comes on contract for the particular well.
Latitude: Enter coordinates. Degrees must be equal to or less than 90.
Note must fill in all values so if Latitude=5, then you must type ‘05’
Minutes{ ‘ } & seconds{ " } less than or equal to 60.
Choose ‘N’ North or ‘S’ South from the drop down menu.
Longitude: Enter coordinates. Degrees must be equal to or less than 180.
Note must fill in all values so if Longitude=5, then you must type ‘005’ & if ‘25’ then ‘025’
Water Depth: Enter water depth (to the appropriate reference i.e. MSL, etc) in the defined units.
RKB to Seabed: (Rotary Kelly Bushings) Enter depth (to the appropriate reference i.e. MSL, etc) in the defined units.
RKB to Wellhead: : (Rotary Kelly Bushings) Enter depth (to the appropriate reference i.e. MSL, etc) in the defined units. On this screen this field is
the only optional piece of information, as this may not be defined until wellhead is in place. You could insert a provisional value and update at a later
period.
Choose ‘E’ East or ‘W’ West from the drop down menu.
Planned TD (MD): Enter a depth in defined units.
Planned TD (TVD): Enter a depth in defined units.
Contract Type: Select the contract type from the drop down menu.
• Dayrate
• Footage
• Incentive
• Integrated Services
• Modified Day rate
• Modified Footage

98 161
• Turnkey.
If the contract type is not on the drop down list then you must click on the underlined word Contact Type and a Modify List- Contract Type will
appear.
Type of work: Select the type of work from the drop down menu.
• Exploration
• Development
• Shipyard
• Stacked
• Non Operational.
If the type of work is not on the drop down list then you must click on the underlined word Type of Work and a Modify List- Type of Work will appear.
Move Date: Select Planned or Actual and click on the white box for the date and select the date from calendar that appears.
On Location: Select Planned or Actual and click on the white box for the date and select the date from calendar that appears.
Spud Date: Select Planned or Actual and click on the white box for the date and select the date from calendar that appears.
Type of Tow: Choose from the drop down menu: Wet / Dry / Self-Propelled.
Distance of Tow: Enter a number in defined units.
Cancel: Exits screen without saving Data.
Finish: Takes you straight to the Well Information screen.
Ø Tight Hole
In the Create New Well screen and Well Information Screen there is a new section dedicate to defining the ‘Tight Hole’ status of the well. This section
is detailed as following:
Definitions as follows:
Normal (No Restrictions): Allows the full transfer of all data from the GRS-Rig to GRS OnLine. Once OnLine, the data is available for viewing to all
users of GRS OnLine
Tight Hole (Restricted to Rig): Prohibits the transfer of Operational data from GRS-Rig to GRS OnLine. This will include all information contained
under the well. Includes:
• Well Information
• Daily Operations Report I & II
• Mud Report
• IADC
• Bit and BHA Run information
Daily and Weekly Executive Summary information will be transferred to Online and hence the fields in the DOR I report’ AM Ops Update’ and 24hr
Forward Plan’ should be filled out with this in mind.
Tight Hole (Restricted to Rig and Rig Manager): allows the transfer of Operational data from GRS-Rig to GRS OnLine, however only the
individual with Rig Manager rights to the specified rig unit will be able to view full operational data.
This definition of `Tight Hole' MUST be made at the beginning of a well.
• If a well is opens as Normal, it can not be subsequently defined as Tight Hole.
• If a well is defined as Tight Hole (Restricted to Rig and Rig Manager), it can not be subsequently defined as Tight Hole (Restricted to Rig).
• If a well is defined as Tight Hole, it can be subsequently defined as normal, however the entire well operational information will become
accessible to all Online users depending on their profile rights.

99 161
Ø Well Information Screen
Well Name: This will default from Create New Well Minimum Well Information. This can be amended.
Country *: This will default from Create New Well Minimum Well Information but you can change the country using the drop down menu, the list is
pre-defined and cannot be altered. The country selection is pre-defined based on the Region within which the unit has been set. Refer to Rig
Identification. This selection cannot be altered.
County: If the county is not on the drop menu then you must click on the underlined word County and a ModifyList- County will appear.
Field Name: This will default from Create New Well Minimum Well Information and cannot be changed in this screen.
Block #: Enter as per operator’s description. For IADC Report.
Slot #: Enter as per operator’s description. For IADC Report.
Lease Enter as per operator’s description. For IADC Report.
API Well #: Enter as per operator’s description. For IADC Report.
Contract Type: This will default from the Create New Well screens. If you should wish to amend, select the contract type from the drop down menu.
• Dayrate
• Footage
• Incentive
• Integrated Services
• Modified Day rate
• Modified Footage
• Turnkey.
If the contract type is not on the drop down list then you must click on the underlined word Contact Type and a Modify List- Contract Type will
appear.
Type of work: Select the type of work from the drop down menu.
• Exploration
• Development
• Shipyard
• Stacked
• Non Operational.
If the type of work is not on the drop down list then you must click on the underlined word Type of Work and a Modify List- Type of Work will appear.
Latitude: Enter coordinates. Degrees must be equal to or less than 90.
Note must fill in all values so if Latitude=5, then you must type ‘05’
Choose ‘N’ North or ‘S’ South from the drop down menu.
Longitude: Enter coordinates. Degrees must be equal to or less than 180.
Note must fill in all values so if Longitude=5, then you must type ‘005’ & if ‘25’ then ‘025’
Choose ‘E’ East or ‘W’ West from the drop down menu.
Planned TD (MD): Enter a depth in defined units.

Planned TD (TVD): Enter a depth in defined units.
RKB to Seabed: (Rotary Kelly Bushings) Enter depth (to the appropriate reference i.e. MSL, etc) in the defined units.
RKB to Wellhead: (Rotary Kelly Bushings) Enter depth (to the appropriate reference i.e. MSL, etc) in the defined units. This field is optional, as the
value may not be defined until wellhead is in place. You could insert a provisional value and update at a later period.
Water Depth: Enter water depth (to the appropriate reference i.e. MSL, etc) in the defined units.
Companies: In this area you will see a list company types that the unit requires for operations each works in the same way. This is optional
Information so only need to fill in what is relevant to your unit. Choose the company name from the drop down menu. If the company’s name is not on
the drop down list then you must click on the specific underlined company type and a ModifyList - Company will appear.
DP Strings (optional Information so only need to fill in what is relevant to your unit)
In this area as in the IADC report (This will default the IADC report) you put in the strings of pipe that the rig uses on the particular well
To enter the info you click on the first white box below Size and a drop down menu arrow will appear for you to select from a pr e define list. The list
was pre defined in Tubular Description: Drill Pipe/HW Drill Pipe. Click to select size and the other info will all default.
Tight Hole Restrictions: Refer to Tight Hole .

100 161
Forecasts/ Incentive Curves: Click on the screen button with the cursor and the Forecasts/ Incentive Curves screen will appear.
Well Lithology: Click on the screen button with the cursor and the Well Lithology screen will appear.
Sections Information: Click on the hypertext link Section Information with the cursor and the Sections Information screen will appear.
Rig Move Information: Click on the hypertext links to Rig move report or complete the available Rig Move Information date fields.

Ø Well Lithology
This screen displays optional information, however it will assist with performance analysis when formation information is linked to BHA and Bit
performance.
Click on the screen button ’Well Lithology’ with the cursor and the Well Lithology screen will appear.
Start Depth: Enter a depth in defined units TVD
Stop Depth: Enter a depth in defined units TVD.
Thickness: This will automatically calculate using the Stop Depth minus the Start Depth.
Formation: The formation is main identification name for a singular or group of Lithology. Select the formation from the drop down menu. If the type
of formation is not on the drop down list then you must click on the underlined word Formation and a Modify List - Formation will appear.
Lithology: Is the main rock structure for the defined formation. Select the Lithology from the drop down menu. If the type of Lithology is not on the
drop down list then you must click on the underlined word Lithology and a Modify List - Lithology will appear.
% of Main: You must enter a number here. The % is the Sub Lithology of the main Lithology.
Sub Lithology: Is the second constituent of the main rock structure for the defined formation. Select the sub lithology from the drop down menu. If
the type of sub-lithology is not on the drop down list then you must click on the underlined word Sub Lithology and a Modify List - Sub Lithology will
appear.
Insert: Select with the cursor the line below where you want to insert a line the click insert button and a new line will appear above the originally
selected line.
Delete: by place cursor on the line of the selected item, click a small (>) will appear on the left-hand side, click the delete line button, line will delete.
Ø Sections Information
This screen displays information required to define the sections for the well.
Sections are defined by the Hole and Casing dimensions. Operations in the Daily Operations Report I are defined against a specific sections such
that meaningful and standardized performance analysis and end of well reviews can be made. Also this information is used to default sundry
information into the Daily Reports and IADC report.
Hole dimensions are detailed in Section.
Casing dimensions are detailed in Casing.
Information can be entered at the beginning of the well (Planned MD, TVD, etc) or at later date when better and more relevant information is
available (Actual depths, joint numbers, etc….). section information should be reviewed at the end of a well to ensure as much relevant information
has been entered.
Click on the hypertext link Section Information with the cursor and the Sections Information screen will appear.

101 161
Ø Section
Section Name: The first section on any well will be moving to the location. Generally this section could be defined as ‘Rig Move’, ‘Moving’ or ‘Pre
Mob’. All the boxes are blocked blue so you cannot enter information into them except the Section Name.
Select the type of work from the drop down menu. If the Section Name is not on the drop down list then you must click on the underlined Section
Name and a Modify-List - Section Name.
Once you choose a section name a space for another section will appear.
Hole Size: Enter a size in defined units.
MD of Section (Planned): Measured Depth, enter the planned depth in defined units.
Actual MD Section: Measured Depth, enter the actual depth in defined units when it is reached.
Actual TVD Section: True Vertical Depth, enter the actual depth in defined units when it is reached.
Days (Planned): the amount of days for the defined section usually taken from the operator’s well plan.
Delete: by place cursor on the line of the selected item, click a small (>) will appear on the Left-hand side, click the delete button, line will delete.
Ø Casing
Section Name: The first section on any well will be moving to the location. Generally this section could be defined as ‘Rig Move’, ‘Moving’ or ‘Pre
Mob’. All the boxes are blocked blue so you cannot enter information into them except the Section Name.
Select the type of work from the drop down menu. If the Section Name is not on the drop down list then you must click on the underlined Section
Name and a Modify-List - Section Name.
Once you choose a section name a space for another section will appear.
Casing Size /Weight / Grade: Select the section name from the drop down menu.
If the Casing Size /Weight / Grade is not on the drop down list then you must click on the underlined Casing Size /Weight / Grade above each column
and the Casing Catalogue will appear.
Casing Size: Select the Casing size from the drop down menu. If the casing size is not on the drop down list then you must click on the underlined
word Casing Size and a Casing Catalogue will appear.
Make: Select the Casing make from the drop down menu. If the casing make is not on the drop down list then you must click on the underlined word
Casing Size and a Modify List - Make will appear.
No. Joints: This is the number of joint in the casing string ran. Including hangers/ housings & pups etc. Enter information after casing has been run.
Length: This is the length of the casing ran (from wellhead to shoe depth) in the defined units. Enter information after casing has been run.
RKB to Casing Head: Is the depth from RKB (Rotary Kelly Bushing) to wellhead or liner hanger.
Formation Integrity Test: This is the result in the defined units of the formation test after drilling out the shoe. I.e. LOT (leak off Test) or limit test
Planned MD Shoe: This should be the original well-planned shoe depth or decided depth prior to running the casing.
Actual MD shoe: The measured depth of the casing shoe in defined units when the casing is set.
Actual TVD Shoe: The actual True Vertical Depth of the casing shoe in defined units when the casing is set.
To Delete a section, go to the section Tab.
Ø Rig Move Information.
Selection of the hypertext (blue and underlined):

• Type of Tow
• Distance of Tow
• Date Last well Completed
• Move Date

102 161
will bring up the Rig Move Report. Rig Move information may have already been recorded through the Rig Move Information section of the Create
New Well Wizard.
Actual Move Date: This date does not contribute to the Rig Move Report. Click on the white box for the date and select the date from calendar that
appears.
On Location: Select Planned or Actual and click on the white box for the date and select the date from calendar that appears.
Spud Date: Select Planned or Actual and click on the white box for the date and select the date from calendar that appears.
Ø Rig Move Report
Well Name & Rig name: These will default and as they are blue blocked you cannot change them.
Operator: Operator as defined on the Well information screen will default. Can not edit.
Person in Charge: Enter person in Charge for the Rig Move.
Latitude & Longitude: Enter coordinates for the destination location.
Region & District Name: Select from drop down list.
Last Periodic Survey: Provide the date when the last Class survey that required a shipyard or authorized underwater survey. Click on this box and
a calendar will appear select the appropriate date.
Water Depth: Expected water depth for the destination location.

103 161
Type of Unit: Enter type of unit from drop down list. CB stands for Cyber Based. DP Semi CB would be the Horizon or Express class, Moored Semi
CB would be the Nautilus, etc…
Tow:
Planned Move Date: Click on the white box for the date and select the date from calendar that appears.
Type of Tow: Choose from the drop down menu: Wet / Dry / Self-Propelled.
Distance of Tow: Enter a number in defined units.
Previous Well:
Date Completed: Click on the white box for the date and select the date from calendar that appears.
Well Name: Pervious name of well before rig move.
Operator: Operator for well before rig move.
REA: Request for Engineering Appraisal that pertains to the expected rig move, if applicable.
Water Depth: Expected water depth for the current location.
Latitude and Longitude: As previously defined.
Country: Select country from drop down list. List is non editable. Note if the unit should relocate from one region to another will result in incorrect
selection of country. In this case, leave the selection blank.
Rig Move Excel Report:

This report includes Notification of an impending Rig move and a Report on completed Rig moves. Report scenarios as follows:
• Installation Move Notification: Non Self Propelled Installations. Includes Jack ups, Barges, Semi Subs (non self propelled).
• Installation Move Notification: Dynamic Positioned Installations. Includes DP Drill ships and Semi Subs.
• Installation Move Report: Moored Semi Sub Installations. Includes Moored Semi Subs
• Installation Move Report: Self Elevating Installations. Includes Jack ups
These reports are undertaken and saved in excel.
There is a ‘Report header’ worksheet included in the Excel report. Information from the GRS rig move report is imported into the Excel report. It is
possible for this imported information to be edited in Excel and will not be changed by GRS.
To edit an Excel Rig move Notification or Report, click on the ‘Edit Excel’. An Excel spreadsheet will open up with a specific file name which links the
report to the rig, the well and the date the report is created.
Once the report/s are completed, save and close the Excel sheet. On the GRS Rig Move report, click the ‘Save Excel’ button.
To open the report again, click on the ‘Edit Excel’.
Print: Select this button to print the Rig Move Report.
Preview: Select this button to look at the print preview.
Ø Riser Running & Pulling Report Log
The utility is designed to quickly generate a Riser Running & Pulling Report from information already stored within the GRS system. Generally, the
first time a Report is generated in a particular field or county, it will take some time for the user to set-up and configure the report correctly. However
on subsequent runs, minor additions or removals from the running string can be suitably managed, and a report quickly generated. Alterations made
through the running process can also be quickly amended and a new report generated.
Click on Riser Running & Pulling Reports and Riser Running and Pulling Report Log appears.
View: Selects an existing report to view or amend. Place the cursor anywhere on a particular record. Click the cursor on the selected report and a
small (>) will appear on the left-hand side of the record. Then click View. Selected Riser Running & Pulling Report will appear.
New: To create a new Riser Running & Pulling Report, click New. New blank Riser Running & Pulling Report will appear.
Close: Exit screen without any further action.

104 161
Ø Riser Running & Pulling Report
In the Riser Running & Pulling Report Log, clicking New will bring up the Riser Running & Pulling Report configuration screen. Once set, this
configuration will take the information located within the GRS database and correctly generate a report.
Before a Riser Running & Pulling Report can be generated the following must be filled out.
Riser Inventory completed. Go to Risers.
BOP fixed dimensions entered in BOP and Joints Measurement.
Diverter Housing, Slip Joint(s), Termination Joint(s) & Intermediate Flex Joint(s), Travelling Assy (Travelling Block, TDS & Pipe Handler) and Riser
Handling Tool fixed dimensions and weights entered in BOP and Joints Measurement: Joints / Diverter.
Riser Running Title: Enter the name of title for this particular run you will generate.
Refer to:
Riser Running & Pulling Report: BOP & Joints Characteristics
Riser Running & Pulling Report: Creation of the Report
Ø Riser Running & Pulling Report: BOP & Joints Characteristics
Initial Joints on BOP: When the BOP is set on the beams (or on the trolley) in the moonpool, a joint or a number of joints will be connected to the
riser adapter on the top of the BOP. These initial 1 or 2 joints will contribute to the initial lift up weight of the entire package (BOP and Riser) and
needs to be considered in the calculation. If only 1 (one) joint is made up to the BOP on picking it up, enter 1 in this field. On some rigs a stand of
riser, 2 (two) joints, will be made up to the BOP on picking it up, hence enter 2 in this field.
Average Pipe Length: This is used to calculate where the DP tool joint will be located relative to the Ram positions. Normally enter 30 for ft
measurements or the equivalent for meters measurements.
Diverter: Select the number Diverter previously specified. The fixed measurements recorded will be used in the calculation.

105 161
Trav. Assembly: Select the number Travelling Assembly (some rigs have two!) previously specified. The fixed measurements recorded will be used
in the calculation.
Riser Hand. Tool: Select the number Riser Handling Tool previously specified. The fixed measurements recorded will be used in the calculation.
Desired Midstroke Change: In the BOP and Joints Measurements screen, the length of the slip joint and the Midstroke length have been detailed.
Generally, if the rig always aims to run the BOP and riser such that Midstroke position is achieved in ideal calm conditions, then enter 0 (zero) in this
field.
On some units, the BOP and riser will be run such that the slip joint in calm conditions will be set at +5’ or –5’ (for example) from Midstroke. In harsh
environment areas, the user will run to have +5’ from Midstroke. That is 5 feet more of inner barrel within the outer barrel so that in an emergency
situation, there is extra length available before the inner barrel connects with the outer barrel.
RKB to Sea Level: This is entered in the Well Information section and automatically available for the configuration.
RKB to Well Head: This is entered in the Well Information section (once confirmed) and automatically available for the configuration.
The above to measurements relative to RKB will give a measurement of the air gap. This air gap is used in the weight calculations and allows
differentiation between the dry and wt weights of each joint of riser, other joints and BOP.
Slip Joint: Select the number Diverter previously specified. The fixed measurements recorded will be used in the calculation.
Interm. Flex Joint: Select the number Intermediate Flex Joint previously specified. The fixed measurements recorded will be used in the calculation.
Termination Joint: Select the number Termination Joint previously specified. The fixed measurements recorded will be used in the calculation.
BOP: Select the number BOP previously specified. The fixed measurements recorded will be used in the calculation.
If the above BOP and Joint Characteristics have been selected correctly, the bottom right hand screen will display as a minimum RKB, Diverter, Slip
Joint and BOP with the associate depths relative to RKB. If Termination and Intermediate Flex Joint has been identified as well, these will be also
shown in the same screen.
Ø Riser Running & Pulling Report: Creation of the Report
On the bottom of the Riser Running & Pulling Report configuration there are two screens.
• The Left screen will display the riser inventory in Set 1, Set 2 or Pup/XO. Upon the selection of the Joint Type, a further selection of Buoyancy
type is required. Once the criteria selection has been made, the joints under this criteria will be displayed below.

106 161
• The Right screen will display the Riser sting and components (BOP, Slip Joint…) as it will look like.
The user builds the Riser string by inserting elements from the inventory. User can highlight on the left screen one joint or multiple joints. (Note: This
does not change any values or locations declared in the Riser Inventory)
• Add: Transfers highlighted joints on the left screen and inserts into the right screen. Will always insert into the bottom of the riser string (above
the BOP).
• Insert: Transfers highlighted joints on the left screen and inserts above the highlighted joint in the right screen.
• Remove: Transfers highlighted joint(s) declared in Riser string on the right and places back into Inventory on the left hand screen
• Arrows on the right of the right screen will move highlighted Joint items within the declared Riser string.
Copy Joints From Last Report: If the Riser String to be run is the same as a Previous string declared with GRS, this facility will allow the copy and
utilization of that string in this Report.
Remaining Depth: As joints are transferred from the Inventory on the left into the string on the rig, the remaining depth all automatically update and
indicate the difference in depth between the BOP datum (Connector) and the Wellhead datum.
Calculate: Based on all information prepared in the configuration screen above, click on calculate to generate the Riser running & Pulling Report.
Ø Weekly Executive Summary
Open screen and New Weekly Executive Summary Report screen appears.
Date: Select the date ‘to’ from the calendar that appears. (Note the date you choose will default to the Sunday after your choice of day i.e. if you
select Mon 10th the date will default to Sun 16th.
Create: Opens up the New Weekly Executive Summary Report
Weekly Executive Summary Report can be printed if required by clicking on printer icon at top of screen. To Exit click ‘X’ top right hand corner.

107 161
9. Well Days
Ø Well Days
GRS Rig can allow the reporting of multiple operations over any number of ‘Open Wells’. This is necessary for situations such as Batch Setting
where a unit will/can move rapidly from one well operation to another and then return to the same well. Numerous wells can be created in GRS and
remain open until it has been determine that no further reporting will be required and the well can then be closed.
GRS-RIG will not allow multiple operations at different well locations to occur within the same time period on the same unit rotary location. One
Rotary Table location can only work on one well location at any one moment in time. GRS-Rig will highlight any operational conflict that may occur
and the user will be required to change the reporting such that this conflict does not occur.
Under each Well Date defined, there is a selection of the following Well Related reports available for input or viewing.
Daily Operations Report I
Daily Operations Report II
Mud Report
IADC Report
Daily Executive Summary
Ø New Day
If you select a new day, a Well New Day screen will appear showing you the defined Rig Name and Well Name. The user is required to confirm the
new date for the well. ‘New Day’ will default to the next incremental day based on existing days created for the well. i.e. If the last recorded date for
the selected well is 12th April, 2001, the 13th April will default as the next date. Should the date displayed not be the ‘New Day’ required, Click on the
white box and a calendar will appear where the appropriate date can be selected.
In the creation of a new day, GRS will look for the selected create date to follow immediately the last dated report in the current selected well. For
example, if the last date in which an Operations has been detailed in the Operations Breakdown of Well A is recorded as 23rd March, 2001, the
application will expect the next date to. 24th March, 2001. Should this not be the case, (due to batch setting or no operational information being
recorded, etc…) GRS will bring up a prompt stating:
The last recorded date on the current selected well which had Operational Information recorded
The most recent date and well that had Operational Information recorded.
If you are working on more than one well during the same day you should first create a new day on the well that contains the first operation at 00:00,
since when you create a new day it will assign a IADC report number automatically.
Create: Will create a new day which will appear in the GRS tree below New Day File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Well "xxxxxx"/ Well Days/ days
date.
Ø Daily Operation Report I
Well Information: The information in the well information section is all write protected. Should you require to change detais in the ‘Well Information’
Section, then if you click on the blue underlined test Well Information which will hyperlink you to the Well Information Screen.
OIM: You can type in a name but if the person is on the POB database then you can use the drop down menu facility to select the name.
Client Rep: You can type in a name but if the person is on the POB database then you can use the drop down menu facility to select the name.
Senior TP: TP= Toolpusher. You can type in a name but if the person is on the POB database then you can use the drop down menu facility to
select the name.
Toolpusher: You can type in a name but if the person is on the POB database then you can use the drop down menu facility to select the name.
Date / Report # / Days on Well / Days since Spud: These will all default using information from elsewhere you cannot change these items in this
report.
Safety & Quality: TRIR Calculations are based on the Number of Work Related Incidents recorded and man-hours recorded in the POB Reports.
Date of last LRI and Incidents last 24 hours information are based the Number of Incidents recorded. (Refer to: Incident Report).
Last BOP P Test: Date of last BOP pressure test should be recorded here. If date needs to be updated, click on the white box and a calendar will
appear where the appropriate date can be selected.
Last BOP F (Function) Test: Date of last BOP function test should be recorded here. If date needs to be updated, click on the white box and a
calendar will appear where the appropriate date can be selected.

108 161
Last Fire Drill: Date of last Fire Drill should be recorded here. If date needs to be updated, click on the white box and a calendar will appear where
the appropriate date can be selected. To view the Drill Log, click on the Blue text Fire Drill. Select the appropriate drill from the log.
Last Enviro. Drill: Date of last Environment Drill should be recorded here. If date needs to be updated, click on the white box and a calendar will
appear where the appropriate date can be selected. To view the Drill Log, click on the Blue text Enviro Drill. Select the appropriate drill from the log.
Last MOB Drill: Date of last Man Overboard Drill should be recorded here. If date needs to be updated, click on the white box and a calendar will
appear where the appropriate date can be selected. To view the Drill Log, click on the Blue text MOB Drill. Select the appropriate drill from the log.
Last Em. Ballast: Date of last Emergency Ballast Drill should be recorded here. If date needs to be updated, click on the white box and a calendar
will appear where the appropriate date can be selected. To view the Drill Log, click on the Blue text EM Ballast Drill. Select the appropriate drill from
the log.
Last Abandon Drill: Date of last Abandon Rig Drill should be recorded here. If date needs to be updated, click on the white box and a calendar will
appear where the appropriate date can be selected. To view the Drill Log, click on the Blue text Abandon Drill. Select the appropriate drill from the
log.
Last SQA: Date of last Service Quality Appraisal should be recorded here. If date needs to be updated, click on the white box and a calendar will
appear where the appropriate date can be selected. To view the SQA Log, click on the Blue text SQA. Select the appropriate SQA report from the
log.
1st Tour Comment / 2nd Tour Comment: In this area you have 4 tick boxes that will automatically insert text into the first blue coloured line of the
comments section. The second white coloured line is for further comments this is the same as and defaults to the IADC comments box. The
comments will automatically be carried over to the next day.
Pit Drill: Select box if a Pit Drill was performed during the Tour. Selecting the box will bring up a ‘Drill Time’ screen where the time taken in minutes
or seconds is recorded. This does not replace the Drills Log Record that a unit keeps.
Trip Drill: Select box if a Trip Drill was performed during the Tour. This does not replace the Drills Log Record that a unit keeps. Selecting the box
will bring up a ‘Drill Time’ screen where the time taken in minutes or seconds is recorded. This does not replace the Drills Log Record that a unit
keeps.
Crown-O-Matic: Select the box if the Crown-O-Matic has been checked during the tour.
SCR: Select box if SCR’s (Slow Circulating Rates) were performed during the Tour. Once selected a SCR Record screen will appear.
Second white coloured line is for additional comments. Click on the line and an Edition Screen will appear in which you can type you comments.
Progress: (Note this area of the screen is used to generate the Daily Executive Summary which is reviewed by all levels of management within
Transocean).
AM OP’s Update: This is for a brief account of the operations in the morning from 0:00 to 06:00. Generally the 24 hour operation breakdown report
will cover 0:00 to 24:00. Click on the line and an Edition Screen will appear in which you can type you comments.
24hrs Forward Plan: This is for a brief description of the plan for the next 24hours. Click on the line and an Edition Screen will appear in which you
can type you comments.
MD: Measured Depth. This value can comes directly from the operational breakdown. It recorded the deepest drilled measured depth.
TVD: True vertical depth of the measured depth reported above. This is a manual input. Enter in defined units.
Hours: This area as you can see is blue blocked and you cannot enter information straight into the boxes.
Circulating: Circulating hours for the 24 hours of the report will be calculated from the Operations Breakdown based on the three codes entered.
Rotating: Rotating hours for the 24 hours of the report will be calculated from the Operations Breakdown based on the three codes entered.
Swivel Packing 1: Swivel packing hours since last ‘reset’. Refer to Reset Swivel Packing. Value is calculated from the Operations Breakdown based
on the three codes entered. Swivel packing is based on rotating only or rotating & circulating hours.
Swivel Packing 2: This will only appear on the screen if you are an Enterprise Class unit. This works the same way as Swivel Packing 1 the
only difference will be see the defaulted selection of 2nd location ‘Fwd’ or ‘Aft Rotary’.
Further information relating to Operation Breakdown, Support Operations Breakdown, Event Report Summary and Incident Report Summary, follow
the link.
If an Event Report or an Incident Report had been created in the 24 hour period defined for the current DOR I, a small summary of each report will be
displayed at the base of the DOR I. These reports will be displayed on the basis that the dates on the report match the date on the DOR I. Links to
any Operations declared in the Operations Breakdown do not contribute to the report being displayed.
OK: Saves data on screen and exit screen.
Cancel: Exit screen without saving any new data on screen.

109 161
Ø Daily Operation Report II
Screen is divided in 5 areas:

• Drilling Parameters
• Bit Data
• BHA Data
• Deviation Record
• Mud Data
Drilling Parameters: This area will be blue with no information unless you have made a Well Run and have detailed that well run in the Operations
Report on DOR I. If you have done this a row of boxes with headings will appear that require information.
WOB: Enter the drilling Weight on Bit (WOB) in defined units.
Pressure: Enter the Pressure you are drilling with on bottom in the defined units.
Flowrate: If you click on the blue box for Flowrate. An information dialogue box will appear and advising that the current modifications have to be
saved before opening Pump Data Record. Click cancel to return to the DOR part2. Click OK to proceed to the Pump Data Record screen.
RPM: ‘Revolutions Per Minute’ the string is being turned by Top Drive or Rotary Table.
Drig Torq: Enter the Drilling on bottom torque in the defined units.
Rot Torq: Enter the Drilling off bottom torque in the defined units.
Rot Wt: Enter the String rotating weight (off bottom) in the defined units.
Up Wt: Enter the String up weight in defined units.
Down Wt: Enter the String up weight in defined units.
Bit Data: All the information on this screen comes from the Bit Record and can only be altered in that record.
BHA Report: This area of the screen is blue blocked and you cannot enter information here. To amend information, click on the words ‘BHA Report’
An information dialogue box will appear and advising that the current modifications have to be saved before opening BHA Report. Click cancel to
return to the DOR part2. Click OK to proceed to the BHA Report Screen.
Pipe Tally: This is a screen button if you select it, an information dialogue box will appear and advising that the current modifications have to be
saved before opening Pipe Tally Report. Click cancel to return to the DOR part2. Click OK to proceed to the Pipe Tally Report Screen.
Deviation Data: This is the same as the IADC report in that we enter all the down hole drilling surveys. As you enter the time the report will generate
new lines so can enter as many surveys as required. It is not obligatory to fill in every survey point. GRS does not calculate any TVD on the basis of
any recorded Deviation information.
Time: Enter hh:mm.
Depth: Enter a depth as per defined units.
Inclination: Enter number up to 2 decimal places.
Azimuth: Enter number up to 2 decimal places.
TVD: Enter depth as per defined units.
Mud Data: This is quick mud report which all information is optional but if required there is a more substantial Mud Report File Path: GRS rig / Rig
selected/Well "xxxxxx"/ Well Days /Mud Report.
You can transfer mud data automatically from Mud Report, see mud Report screen
Type of Mud: Type in type i.e. Water based, Oil Based Mud. POBM Pseudo Oil Based Mud…etc.
MW In: Enter the mud weights in the defined units a number up to 2 decimal places
MW Out: Enter the mud weight in the defined units
PV: enter the Plastic Viscosity in defined units.
Visco.: Viscosity in defined Units.
YP: Enter the Yield Point in defined units.

110 161
Gels: Enter the gels reading in the defined units.
Sands %: Enter the sand % a number up to 2 decimal places
Solids %: Enter the sand % a number up to 2 decimal places
Salts %: Enter the sand % a number up to 2 decimal places
PH : Enter the Alkalinity Reading.
OK: Saves data on screen and exit screen.
Cancel: Exit screen without saving any new data on screen.
Ø Mud Report
This is a detailed report, for the benefit of Transocean Well Construction group and is optional. It is best suited to Incentive or Turnkey work or where
the unit needs to track and manage a lot of the Solid Control equipment.
Information for this report would normally come from the mud Engineer on the unit.
This report has several areas the headings:
Mud Properties, Circ.Volumes, Annular Sections, Volumes last 24hrs, Solid Controls Equipment Last 24hrs, Shaker Screen Sizes, Product Inventory.
At the top of the report
Rig Name/ Well Name /Date: Will default.
Mud Type /Daily Cost / Cumulative Cost: will also default from the Daily Operations Report Part 2, Mud Data.
Depth MD: Enter in as per defined units. Should default from the Daily Operations Report Part1
Depth TVD: Enter in as per defined units. Should default from the Daily Operations Report Part1
High Gravity %: Enter as a % up to 2 decimal places.
High Gravity Wt: Enter in as per defined units
Mud Properties: The Mud Engineer will be able to fill this out or provide the information. Entering the data in the defined units.
Mud properties can automatically be transferred to DOR II by Clicking on the DOR II button in the bottom of the column where you have entered the
Mud Properties you want to have in DOR II.
Circ.Volumes: Enter the Volumes in the defined units

Hole: Enter the volume of mud in the hole in the defined units.
Active Pits: Enter the volume of mud in the Active pits in the defined units.
Total Circ. Vol.: Calculates the Tot. Circ. Volume by adding Hole volume and Active pits
Reserve Pits: Enter the Reserve Pits volume of mud in the defined units.
Annular Sections: This section allows you to enter all the well annular sections information listed below.
Hole Diameter
Pipe Diameter
Critical Velocity
Viscosity
Annular P-Loss
Enter all in defined units.
Volumes last 24hrs: This allows you to enter all the volume information listed below.
Mud Received
Mud Disposed
Synthetic Added Water Added
Evaporation
Downhole Loss
Centrifuge Loss

111 161
Other Losses
Solid Controls Equipment Last 24hrs: This is a log of the equipment that has been used to treat the mud during the last 24hours. Including
Shakers themselves.
Type: Enter the type of equipment i.e. desilter or desander.
Model/Size: This will be the manufacturers information.
Hrs Used: Enter the hour the equipment has run in the last 24hours.
Shaker Screen Sizes: ( A way of tracking you shaker screens in use)
Number: Enter the screen number (when you enter a number you will see another line appear so you can enter as many as you require.
Screen Size: Enter the size of the screen.
Hrs Used: Enter the hours the screen has been used.
Product Inventory: Product Inventory links back to Products Database in which you have chosen certain products to be
shown in the Marine report and’/or in the Mud report. If the products have NOT been defined in the Products Database,
then they will not be available for the Mud Report. Click the cursor on the underlined blue word Products and "Mud Input
screen" will appear.
Ø IADC
Click on IADC an IADC Report screen will appear. You must select one of the tick choice’s relating to the report
Real Time: means the report will be produced using the time you used in the operations report down to the minute i.e. 14:27 to 14:41.
15min: means the report will be produced using the time you used in the operations report rounded to the nearest 15mins of the hour i.e. 14:27
would become 14:30 and 14:48 would become 14:45.
30min: means the report will be produced using the time you used in the operations report rounded to the nearest 30mins of the hour i.e. 14:27
would become 14:30 and 14:48 would become 15:00.
Once you have selected the time criteria then. You click on OK and you will observe a IADC progress report then the screen will jump to "Save As:
IADC_Report screen".
Save As: IADC_Report screen: This is a normal Window Save as screen showing you the file you will save in giving you the choice to save
somewhere else. All the user has to do is click on save and the report will save to the file IADC that is on the C drive of the computer as it was
installed with the set up of the program. GRS has a default save location called Reports/IADC under the GRS application folder.
You should now notice that a word file has appeared in the menu bar at the bottom of the screen if you click on it the IADC will appear on you screen.
This is an Electronic version of the IADC which consists of 4 pages which when put side by side will show you the full IADC paper report.
Ø IADC Page 1
Lease, Well Number, API Well Number, Water Depth, Operator: are all detailed when the well is first created. These details can be viewed in the
Well Information Screen.
Date: The created well date for the report.
DP Size, Weight, Grade, Tool Jt O.D., Thread Type: Defined in the Tubular Description. String Number is selected in the well Information screen
under DP String.
Pump Information: Defined in the Mud Pump Definition Screen.
Time Distribution Hours: Breakdown as per IADC coding in the Main Operations Breakdown for the specific date. Rig Specific tiles updated as per
entries in the Rates & Codes Screen.
Hours with/without Drill pipe: Operator or Contactor Drill pipe defined in the Tubular Description (Transocean or Client). Hours without Drill pipe
occur when Operation breakdown Main code is not ‘Drilling’ or ‘Sidetracking’.
No. of Days from Spud: Calculated from ‘Actual Spud Date’.
Cumulative Rotating Hours: Calculated total rotating hours for the well as defined in the Operations breakdown. Codes have a ‘Rotating Hours flag’
attached. These can be viewed and amended via Operational Classification.
Drilling Assembly: Defined in Run BHA for the particular tour. BHA displayed is BHA recorded as at the end of the tour (e.i. at 12:00 or 24:00 hrs).
Only one BHA can be defined per tour. 18 maximum elements per BHA can be defined.

112 161
Bit Record: Defined in Run Bit for the particular tour. Bits displayed are last two Bits recorded as at the end of the tour (e.i. at 12:00 or 24:00 hrs).
Only two Bits can be defined per tour.
Mud Record: Three Mud Records per tour available. Information derived from Mud details at bottom of Mud Report. If this is left blank, then
information comes from the basic Mud details at the bottom of the DOR II. DOR II information will be repeated in both day and night tours.
Mud and Chemicals Added: Derived from Mud Products Inventory on the Mud Report.
Remarks: 1st Tour and 2nd tour comments of the DOR I.
Ø IADC Page 2
Field or District, County, State/Country: are all detailed when the well is first created. These details can be viewed in the Well Information Screen.
Wire Line record: Derived from Wire Line record on Departmental Activity Report for the day.
Last Casing Tubular or Liner: Derived from information recorded in the Section Information or the Well Information screen. Sections details in the
IADC are the last three section previous to the latest section detailed in the operations breakdown. For example, if Section 5 (8 ½" x 7" Liner Section)
is being detailed in the Operations Breakdown, then sections 4, 3 & 2 will be displayed as last casing, tubing or liner.
Parameters: If Drilling or Sidetracking has been defined as a Main code in the Operations Breakdown then any drilling, coring or making hole
operation where depth is created will be recorded here. Each line in the IADC details parameters for one run. DOR II only allows one lot of
parameters to be record per run per day.
If run 8 only is recorded for all 12 of the Night and Day tour, then the same parameters recorded in the DOR II for run 8 will be displayed in both the
Night and Day tour section.
If run 8 is recorded for the Night tour and then run 9 is introduced in the Day tour, then parameters recorded in the DOR II for run 8 will be displayed
in the Night tour section and parameters recorded in the DOR II for run 8 & 9 will be displayed in the Day tour section.
If run 8 is recorded for the Night tour, run 9 is introduced in the Night tour, then run 10 is introduced in Day tour section, then parameters recorded in
the DOR II for run 8 & 9 will be displayed in the Night tour section and parameters recorded in the DOR II for run 9 & 10 will be displayed in the Day
tour section.
Pump No.1….4, Total Pump Output: Derived from Flow Rate information entered on the DOR II report.
Deviation Record: Derived from Deviation Data entered on the DOR II report.
Operational Details: Derived from the Operations Breakdown screen of the DOR I report. For Dual/Multi Activity units, only the main operations are
recorded in the IADC report. Maximum of 18 entries per tour are available.
Where as the Operation Breakdown description will allow a large amount of information per event, only the first line to a maximum of 99 characters
will be transferable and viewable in the IADC Details of Operations.
Ø IADC Page 3
Night Tour from…to… : Derived from Tour Configuration screen.

Crew: Derived from Crew for IADC screen.
Employee ID, Name, Hrs: Derived from POB Report for the same day the IADC reports is being created for. Each crewmember that needs to be
reported on the IADC report must be specified as a Day or Night shift worker in the POB report.
If the IADC report has not been initialised for the day (i.e. opened at least once), then POB information will not be available to transfer into the IADC
report.
If, through the Crew for IADC screen, 3 Roughnecks positions (for example) have been defined, but in the POB report 4 Roughnecks have been
declared for a tour, then the first 3 alphabetically sorted Roughnecks will be inserted into the IADC report.
If the a crew member is not recorded in the POB report for the 3rd September, 2001, then that crew member will not appear in the IADC report for the
3rd September, 2001.
If the a crew member is recorded in the POB report for the 3rd September, 2001 but not assigned to a tour (day or night), then that crew member will
not appear in the IADC report for the 3rd September, 2001.
Days since last Lost Time Accident: Derived from the HSE reports entered into GRS. Days are based on the last rig incident, not crew incident.

113 161
Ø Daily Executive Summary
The Daily Executive summary is a report that is consolidated on GRS-OnLine for District, Regional and Corporate Management. It is the first ‘picture’
most people in the Transocean community will see about the daily operations of a unit. Hence it is important that this report is reviewed and quality
checked. All information on the Executive report is captured from other locations in GRS except for the following that must be filled out on the report:
As an Offshore Management user:
Only enter 3 items in the report (The white boxes) from the rig side.
Contract Start: Enter: When you click on the box for the date a calendar will appear select the date.
Contract End: When you click on the box for the date a calendar will appear select the date.
Est. Days to Complete: Enter the number of days estimated to finish the current well.
After the next day roles over the estimated days until completion will be subtracted by one. There is no need to update this every day. It only needs
updated when any of the fields are incorrect.
Ø Weekly Executive Summary
The Weekly Executive summary is a report that is a consolidation of the Daily Executive Summary. It is available on GRS-OnLine. Hence it is
important that this report is reviewed and quality checked. All information on the Weekly Executive report is captured from other locations in GRS
except for the following that must be filled out on the report:
As an Offshore Management user:
Only enter 3 items in the report (The white boxes) from the rig side.
Contract Start: Enter: When you click on the box for the date a calendar will appear select the date.
Contract End: When you click on the box for the date a calendar will appear select the date.
Est. Days to Complete: Enter the number of days estimated to finish the current well.
As a Rig Manager user, enter 4 items in the report (The white boxes) from the shore-based side.
Contract Start, Contract End & Est. Days to Complete: As above.
Marketing Highlights: Enter any relevant Marketing highlights for the Unit.
Note: Information entered by the ‘Offshore Management’ user into the Contract Start, Contract End and Est. Days to Complete fields will be
transferred to the Rig Manager. Information entered by the ‘Rig Manager’ user into the Contract Start, Contract End, Est. Days to Complete and
Marketing Highlights fields will be transferred to GRS-Online but will NOT be transferred back to the Offshore Unit GRS-Rig system.

114 161
Ø SCR Record
1 set of SCR’s can be recorded as many times as required. Only one set of SCR’s will be recorded per tour, so only the last amendments to an SCR
record will be saved.
Time: Enter a time hh:mm.

MD: Measured Depth at which the SCR was taken. Enter in defined Units.
TVD: True Vertical Depth at which the SCR was taken. Enter in defined Units.
Mud Weight: Mud Weight at which the SCR was taken. Enter in defined Units.
Display in Tour Comments: Insert text string in this field for info relating to the SCR’s taken. This text will be displayed in the Tour comments
section on the DOR I report and IADC.
Display of SCR Standpipe Pressure readout: SCR pressure values can be displayed as a function of SPM from each pump or as GPM from a
collection of pumps.
• SPM Option: A maximum of two pumps can have SCR information entered. Once a second pump begins to have data entered into it, the
two remaining unused Pumps will become blue and write protected. Clear data from one of the two pumps with information, and the
remaining two pumps will become white and write enabled.
• GPM Option: On some rigs (deepwater), suitable slow circulating rates can only be effectively achieved using a combination of pumps. In
these cases, the flow rate measurement on the standpipe is of suitable quality that a steady and accurate pressure can be maintained and
controlled against the formation. Only one entry box is available in this option against a maximum selection of four flow rates.
The following standpipe pressures to be entered under the relevant flow rate measurements. All are optional in that all the boxes do not need to be
filled in.
Pressure Up Riser
Pressure Up Choke
Pressure up Kill
Pressure up Choke & Kill

115 161
Ø Last Casing
This area is blue blocked and you cannot enter information straight into the boxes. To see detailed information you can click on the words ‘Last
Casing’ and Casing Information screen will appear. The ‘Last casing’ will display casing information in the previous section. For example, if the
Operations Breakdown is referring to section 4, casing information for section 3 will be displayed.
Casing Information: Information recorded on this screen cannot be altered. Alterations are achieved through the Section Information of Well
Information Report.
Should you wish to manually select the ‘Last Casing’ for this report, click anywhere the particular line of information for a casing string and then
select the on screen button ‘Apply’ Note you can only select one string of casing to appear on the report.
Apply: Applies the selected string of casing to appear on the DOR Part 1 and exits the casing Information screen.
Cancel: Exit the screen without applying and information to appear on the DOR Part 1 and exits the casing Information screen.
Ø Reset Swivel Packing
Click on the underlined words Swivel Packing 1 (Swivel Packing 1 or 2 for Multi-Activity) the ‘Reset Swivel Packing’ screen will appear.
Rotary Table: Set-up for the Rotary table based on the units’ definition in Rig Identification and Multi Activity.
Last Reset. That area of the screen showing Date & Hour is blue blocked and cannot be changed. This data defaults to when Swivel Packing was
last reset.
New Reset. Current date & time will default into the white boxes. Might be required to change the entry to the correct information.
To select a ‘Date’, click on the white box, a calendar will appear and you select the date. Then you select the ‘Hour’ the swivel packing was replaced
by typing the hh: mm.
Include Circulation: Swivel packing hours can be calculated on the basis of Rotating hours only, or Rotating & circulating hours. Tick the ‘Include
Circulating’ to include or exclude circulating hours.
Change Calculation Option: Ticking the ‘Include Circulation’ box will only affect calculations made after the ticking. To update the calculation back
to the ‘Last Reset’ date and time, click on the ‘Change calculation option’ button.

116 161
Ø Operations Breakdown
This is the heart of the GRS Operational Reporting system. Detailed and correct information entered into this section cascade to many areas within
the GRS. Through the use of a three-code system, it is possible to have standardization in the grouping and analysis of the various operations
performed on different types of units in the different worldwide locations.
Operations Breakdown has two elements. Main daily operations which occur between 00:00 hrs and 24:00 hrs and next day Morning operations from
24:00/(00:00) to 06:00 hrs.
For Multi Activity Units, the facility to record operations as ‘Support Functions’ to the Main Rotary Location (revenue generating) is possible. Units
defined in the Rig Identification as Express Class or Enterprise Class will display the Support Operations facility.
Access to the Operations Breakdown (and Secondary Activity) screen is achieved by clicking on the Hyperlink Main Operations or Support
Operations on the DOR I screen.
Ø Main Operations
Operations Breakdown has two elements. Main daily operations which occur between 00:00 hrs and 24:00 hrs and next day Morning operations from
24:00/(00:00) to 06:00 hrs.
Location: This will only appear (to the left of From/ To) an Enterprise class Unit is specified. Click in the white box, a drop down menu with 3
choices Aft Rotary / Fwd Rotary /Mousehole. Select the location where the main revenue generating operations are.
From: Enter a time hh:mm. The start time of an operation.
To: Enter a time hh:mm. The time you completed an operation.
Dur: Duration will automatically work out the time the operation took from the entered From / To times.
Depth: From & To: Enter a depth in defined units for the depth of the bit. If there is no assembly in the hole, the depth is ‘0’.
Operational Codes: This is split into 3: Main / Primary / Secondary. In selecting a main code, this will influence the Primary code pre-defined drop
down list. In selecting a Primary code, this will influence the Secondary code pre-defined drop down list.
Main Code: Select the arrow in the box and use the drop down menu, which has a pre-defined list, you select one by clicking on the selection.
Primary Code: Select the arrow in the box and use the drop down menu which has a pre-defined list, you select one by clicking on the selection.
Secondary Code: Select the arrow in the box and use the drop down menu, which has a pre-defined list, you select one by clicking on the selection.
IADC: When an operation is defined (Main, Primary and Secondary activities), the program automatically fills the corresponding IADC and NPT
codes. These codes are calculated from the current Operations. The user can change the assigned codes using the selection lists provided in IADC
and NPT columns.
Rate: Rate will automatically fill in as since IADC code should have had a rate pre-assigned. This is achieved through the Rates & Codes Screen.
Should the user need to amend the value use the drop down menu, which come from a pre-defined list.
Section: Select the arrow in the box and use the drop down menu, which has a pre-defined list, you select one by clicking on the selection. This field
must be filled out. Note the sections you will have defined in the Well Information - Section Information.
Run: Select the arrow in the box and use the drop down menu, which has a pre-defined list, you select one by clicking on the selection. Not
obligatory to fill out. Note the Runs you will have defined in Well Runs.
NPT-Code: The code will default from Operations codes once they are selected but you can select a different NPT code if you require. Select the
arrow in the box and use the drop down menu, which has a pre-defined list, you select one by clicking on the selection.
NPT-Reas: The code will default from the NPT code once it is selected. But you can select a different reason code if you require. Select the arrow in
the box and use the drop down menu, which has a pre-defined list, you select one by clicking on the selection. Note the choice of NPT code will
influence the pre-defined list of reasons. Go to P/NPT classifications.
When you complete an operations entry you will notice that the on screen buttons Insert & Delete are active by clicking on them.
IADC, NPT Code & NPT Reason can be amended to suit rig specific requirements by reviewing the Classification Review section.
Event: This will link the specific Operation breakdown line to an Operational Event Report (OER). Click on the ‘Event’ field and the Operation Events
Log will appear. If an existing OER already had been declared against the specific Operation breakdown line, when clicking in the ‘Event’ field the
following screen will appear:

117 161
Yes: Allows the link between the Operational breakdown and the OER to be maintained and opens the OER for review.
No: Allows the link between the Operational breakdown and the OER to be maintained but does not open the OER for review. Reverts back to the
DOR I screen.
Cancel: Breaks the link between the Operational breakdown and removes the OER number from the field. Reverts back to the DOR I screen.
Insert: This will after you have selected an operation shown by the arrow > that appears in the left-hand side of the screen. It inserts an empty
operation above your selected operation.
Delete: This will after you have selected an operation shown by the arrow ‘>’ that appears in the left-hand side of the screen. It will delete it.
When you have completed the day’s operations the last to time will be 24:00 that will default to 00:00.
Save: Saves the data on the screen.

Ø Support Operations
For Multi Activity Units (Express of Enterprise Class Units), the facility to record operations as ‘Support Functions’ to the Main Rotary Location
(revenue generating) is possible. Since GRS version 3.0, there is the ability for Standard rigs to record Support Operations and display then on the
DOR I. To enable or disable this feature on standard rigs, refer to the Multi-Activity section under Rig Information.
To get to the Support operations you must go to the Daily Operations Report Part 1 and click on the words Support Operations near the bottom of the
on screen Daily Operations Report Part I. When you click on this the Operational Breakdown - Support Operations screen will appear.
This screen works exactly the same way as the Main Operations Screen.
Express Class Units: Operational Codes available in the support operation is details in Operational Codes - Express and are limited solely to those
defined for the Mousehole location.
Enterprise Class Units: Operational Codes available in the support operation is details in Operational Codes - Enterprise and are limited solely to
those defined for the support function.
Section: Select the arrow in the box and use the drop down menu, which has a pre-defined list, you select one by clicking on the selection. This field
must be filled out. Section is the support operations may be the current section or future sections the support operations may be preparing for. Note
the sections you will have defined in the Well Information - Section Information.

118 161
Ø Operational Codes
For each operation that is recorded in this operations time breakdown screen, the user must assign a Main Code followed by a PRIMARY and
SECONDARY code. These codes are selected from the selection list that is available for each data field.
The MAIN code identifies the main operation in progress. The choices available are:
Moving
Drilling
Well Testing
Completion
Workover
Fishing
Side Tracking
Well Control
Lost Circulation
Off Contract
Generally the Main code remains constant over a number of sections and is not changed for each operation. It can be directly selected from the
selection list by typing the first letter, for example type D to automatically select Drilling.
PRIMARY codes are based on the Main code that has been selected. Primary codes describe the Operation being undertaken.
SECONDARY codes are based on the Primary code that has been selected. Secondary codes describe the reason for Operation being undertaken.
Examples as follows:
Primary Code Secondary Code Explanation

POOH BHA POOH because of BHA (need to modify)
Circulating Condition Mud Circulating in order to condition the mud.
Run Casing Tubing Running a casing string which happens to be tubing
For Express and Enterprise Class units, because of their concurrent ‘mutiactivity’ and ‘multi-location’ operations, additional codes are required to
capture their support operations.

119 161
Ø Main Codes
The Main Code headings have been selected to ensure that as wide a range of well operations can be captured and analysed at a later date. Many
operations we undertake are of a similar nature regardless of the aim of the operations involved. By separate identity of the main operations we can
clearly identify the purpose of such actions. In addition to the separate identification of different types of well operations e.g.: Completions and
Workovers, the codes also separately identify major non-programmed operations from programmed operations. This ensures that we capture Non
Productive Time in an effective manner and are able to clearly identify the reasons for the Non Productive time when we come to analyse the data.
COMPLETION: This Main Code will be used for all programmed Completion operations. Minor non-programmed operations such as POOH tubing
due to downhole equipment failure will also be covered by this code. Due to the nature of Completion operations, programmed well control events
have been included under this main code heading. All other major non-programmed operations such as fishing, well control and lost circulation will
be covered by the following main codes F, H & I. All corrective and preventative maintenance during Completion operations will be covered by this
main code apart from that undertaken during Fishing, Well Control or Lost Circulation.
DRILLING: This Main Code will be used for all programmed drilling operations, plug back and abandon. This will include geological sidetracks and
any other drilling operations that result from a change to the drilling programme. Non-programmed drilling operations such as POOH due to
downhole equipment failure etc. will also be covered by this code. All other major non-programmed operations such as fishing, Side-Tracking due to
downhole problems, well control and lost circulation will be covered by the following main codes F, G, H & I. All corrective and preventative
maintenance during Drilling operations will be covered by this main code apart from that undertaken during Side-Tracking, Fishing, Well Control or
Lost Circulation.
FISHING: This Main Code will be used for all non-programmed operations involving stuck pipe and fishing activities and downhole incidents not
covered elsewhere. It will be used from the time the fishing operations commence (e.g. when the pipe becomes stuck or the twist off occurs), to the
time the fishing operations cease (e.g.: when the fish is recovered and programmed operation re-commence), or when the decision is made to side-
track and Side-Tracking operations commence. All corrective and preventative maintenance during Fishing operations will be covered by this main
code apart from that undertaken during Well Control or Lost Circulation.
LOST CIRCULATION: This Main Code will be used for all non-programmed Lost Circulation remedial operations. It shall be used from the time that
Lost Circulation Occurs to the time that conventional operations re-commence or other major non-programmed operations are undertaken (such as
Fishing or Side-Tracking). All corrective and preventative maintenance during Lost Circulation operations will be covered by this main code apart
from that undertaken during Fishing, Side-Tracking or Well Control.
MOVING: This Main Code will be used for all operations involving moving the rig to and from the well location, her positioning over the well location
and on securing the unit for well operations. It shall also be used for operations involving acceptance testing prior to well operations commencement.
All corrective and preventative maintenance during the above operations will be covered by this main code.
OFF CONTRACT: This Main Code will be used for when the unit is Off Contract. When a unit is off contract, the unit is not assigned to an Operator
and zero rate/revenue will be recorded against all operations.
PORT MH: This Main Code (for Express class units only) will be used if operations at the rotary table ARE dependent on the support operation of the
Port Mousehole. The focus of the operational and revenue generating activity moves to the Port Mousehole location. See Operational Codes -
Express.
SIDE-TRACKING: This Main Code will be used for all non-programmed Side-Tracking operations which result from downhole problems such as
bore-hole instability, stuck pipe, irrecoverable fish etc. It will be used from the time the decision is made to commence Sidetracking operations to the
time that the previous well depth has been reached. All corrective and preventative maintenance during Sidetracking operations will be covered by
this main code apart from that undertaken during Fishing, Well Control or Lost Circulation.
STARBOARD MH: This Main Code (for Express class units only) will be used if operations at the rotary table ARE dependent on the support
operation of the Starboard Mousehole. The focus of the operational and revenue generating activity moves to the Starboard Mousehole location. See
Operational Codes - Express.
WELL CONTROL: This Main Code will be used for all non-programmed Well Control operations. It shall be used from the time a well control problem
is detected to the time that conventional operations re-commence or other major non-programmed operations are undertaken (such as Fishing or
Side-Tracking). All maintenance during Well Control operations will be covered by this main code apart from that undertaken during Fishing, Well
Control or Lost Circulation. (Preventative Maintenance has not been included).
WELL TESTING: This Main Code will be used for all programmed Well Testing Operations. Minor non-programmed operations such as POOH
tubing due to downhole equipment failure will also be covered by this code. Due to the nature of Well Testing operations, programmed well control
events have been included under this main code heading. All other major non-programmed operations such as fishing, well control and lost
circulation will be covered by the following main codes F, H & I. All corrective and preventative maintenance during Well Testing operations will be
covered by this main code apart from that undertaken during Fishing, Well Control or Lost Circulation.
WORKOVER: This Main Code will be used for all programmed Workover operations. Due to the nature of Workovers, fishing and well control
operations have been included under this main code heading. However other major non-programmed operations such as Well Control and Lost
Circulation will be covered by the following main codes H & I. All corrective and preventative maintenance during Workover operations will be
covered by this main code apart from that undertaken during Well Control or Lost Circulation.

120 161
Ø Primary Codes
The Primary Codes describe the nature of the operations being conducted i.e.: what you are doing. The codes are presented in alphabetical order,
as they will appear in the GRS programme.
Note: Only those codes relevant to the selected Main Code will appear in the pick lists.
Acceptance Testing: Operations involving the testing of equipment as defined by the Client or Transocean as needed before rig is accepted for
Contract or commencement of Programmed Operations. Primarily in Moving main code.
Ballasting: The operation involving the ballasting of the rig - primarily used in Moving Main Code.
Cementing: Operations involving mixing and pumping of cement.
Circulating: Operations involving only the circulation of fluids through/around the well ( e.g. for hole cleaning, cementing, conditioning mud or for
samples (formation evaluation) where other operations are suspended.
Coiled Tubing: Any Operations involving coiled tubing.
Coring: Making hole with a core head and barrel for formation evaluation. Coring will also include opening the hole after coring if required to regain
nominal hole size.
Corrective Maintenance: All operations involved and required for repairs to Transocean Rigs and equipment (including Transocean sub-contracted
equipment). This includes those actions required to make the rig ready for repairs such as POOH, Circulate etc. and those actions required to re-
commence normal operations.
Cut Casing: The operation involving the actual cutting of casing. e.g.: on well abandonment, workover or side-track.
Diving/ROV: All Operations involving the use of Divers or ROV.
DP Wireline: The operation of running wireline through Drill Pipe or other tubulars currently in the hole.
Drilling: The actual process of Drilling (apart from coring). This will cover all drilling where drilling progress is being made either from conventional
rotary or slide mode. Used for drilling formation or hard cement.
Exporting from Wells: Exporting produced hydrocarbons from the well to a storage or transportation unit.
Fishing: The actual operation of fishing downhole equipment from the well (covers Jarring, working pipe and operating fishing tools etc.)
Flow Check: The operation of suspending circulation and other operations to check if there is flow from the well.
Flow Well: The process of allowing the well to flow from productive zones in a reservoir. Used only in Well Testing, Completion and Workover Main
codes.
Function Testing: The operation of testing the functions of surface or downhole equipment e.g.: BOP or Test Tools.
Inject: The operation involving the actual injection of fluids into the wellbore and formation. For squeeze or stimulation.
Jack Down: The operation of the rigs jacking system to lower the rig.
Jack Up: The operation of the rigs jacking system to raise the rig.
Jetting: The operation of pumping fluids through a jetting tool to clean up sections of the well (normally the wellhead or BOP)
Lay Down: The operation of laying down equipment (surface or downhole) from the drill floor to the main deck after it has been used.
Milling: The operation of milling on downhole equipment for fishing or specialised operations. This relates to dressing or removal of steel items within
the well.
Moving: The operation of moving the rig from one location to another. This may involve a tow or be limited to skidding from one slot to another.
Opening Hole: The operation of increasing the diameter of the wellbore of a previously drilled interval using a hole opener or a bit. (This does not
include "under-reaming" which is covered by a primary code of that name below.)
Operate Downhole Equipment: The actual operation of any downhole tool. Examples include circulation subs, core barrels, adjustable stabilisers,
packers, fishing tools such as reverse circulating junk baskets, overshots etc. Note: we have not included separate downhole tools in the secondary
codes as they are too numerous.
Orientate: The operation involving the orientation of equipment or downhole tools. This may be for running wellheads, surveys or for directional
drilling.
Other Repairs: All repair operations that do not involve Transocean equipment (including Transocean sub-contracted equipment). (See Corrective
Maintenance). e.g.: Client or Service company equipment.
Penetration Test: The operation involving the testing of the sea bed soil strength normally undertaken prior to well spud with the spud BHA and bit,
or on jacking down legs.
Pick-Up: The operation of picking up equipment (surface or downhole) from the main deck to the drill floor prior to its actual use.
Planned Shutdown: Operations occurred during an agreed shutdown of the rig unit while under contract.
POOH: Non-Speed Restricted: The operation of pulling the drill string/BHA or tubing from the well at a maximum speed. Note: Casing is not
included - see "Pull Casing".

121 161
POOH: Speed Restricted: The operation of pulling the drill string/BHA or tubing from the well at a controlled speed. Reasons for controlled POOH
due to possible swabbing of hole, damage to wellbore or POOH with wet pipe. Note: Casing is not included - see "Pull Casing".
POOH: BHA POOH and racking stands of BHA elements into the derrick. Not for laying out onto the pipe deck.
POOH: The operation of pulling to surface large and awkward items of equipment.
Positioning: The operation of positioning the Rig over the well location. Used only in the Moving main code.
Pre-Load: The operation of pumping fluids into pre-determined pre-load tanks on a Jack-Up rig to ensure that the sea bed will take the required
loads on the legs from well operations. Conducted after positioning the rig over the well location and jacking up.
Pressure Testing: All Operations which involve purposely imparting hydraulic pressure to Equipment or the Well (e.g. BOP, Downhole Test
equipment, Casing, Leak-off Test etc.)
Preventative Maintenance: The operation of conducting routine maintenance work on the rig and/or equipment to ensure against unprogrammed
failure.
Pull Casing: The operation of pulling casing from the well either due to downhole failure (e.g. hole condition) or after cutting casing (for well
abandonment or side-tracking). Non Speed restricted.
Pull Casing Speed Restricted: The operation of pulling casing from the well either due to downhole failure (e.g. hole condition) or after cutting
casing (for well abandonment or side-tracking) at a controlled speed.
Pull Riser: The operation of pulling the riser (including unlatch) to recover the BOP or LMRP from the wellhead. (Either routine operation or for
weather) Note Pulling Riser/BOP for repairs will be covered by the Corrective Maintenance primary code.
Reaming: The operation of rotating the bit/BHA in the well above bottom where an obstruction or potential obstruction exists.
Regulatory Maintenance / Certification: All operations involved and required for conducting inspections or modifications to Transocean Rigs and
equipment (including Transocean sub-contracted equipment) required by the regulatory authorities outwith standard corrective and preventative
maintenance. This includes those actions required to make the rig ready for such works e.g.: POOH, Circulate etc. and those actions required to re-
commence normal operations.
Retrieve Anchors: The operation of retrieving the rig’s anchors prior to moving the rig to a new location.
Rig Down / Nipple Down: The operation of rigging/nippling down equipment in situ such as the BOP and surface well test equipment. Moving the
equipment to the main deck after use is covered by the "Lay Down" primary code.
Rig Up / Nipple Up: The operation of rigging/nippling up equipment in situ such as the BOP and surface well test equipment. Moving the equipment
from the main deck prior to use is covered by the "Pick Up" primary code.
RIH: Non-Speed Restricted: The operation of running the drill string/BHA or tubing from the well at a maximum speed. Note: Casing is not included
- see "Run Casing".
RIH: Speed Restricted: The operation of running the drill string/BHA or tubing from the well at a controlled speed. Reasons for controlled POOH due
to surging of hole, damage to wellbore or PCL. Note: Casing is not included - see "Run Casing".
RIH: BHA RIH with BHA elements racked back stands into the derrick. Not for picking up off the pipe deck.
RIH: The operation of lowering/running into the well large and awkward items of equipment.
Run Anchors: The operation of running/laying the rig’s anchors following moving the rig from another location.
Run Casing: The operation of running casing into the well to case off previously drilled formations. Non Speed restricted
Run Casing Speed Restricted: The operation of running casing into the well to case off previously drilled formations at a controlled speed.
Run Riser: The operation of running the riser (including latch) to position the BOP or LMRP on the wellhead including pressure testing of Kill &
Choke lines. (Either routine operation or for weather). Note Running Riser/BOP following repairs will be covered by the Corrective Maintenance
primary code.
Safety Drill: All actions involving suspension of operations to conduct a drill to train personnel in safety related events. Normally will only include
Well Control drills where operations will require suspension.
Shut In Well: All actions involved in shutting in the well on detection of (or suspected) flow from the well or following programmed flowing of the well
for well testing purposes.
Stacked: Rig stored while off contract. Either warm or cold.
Surveying: All operations involving the conducting of surveys either for the well location or well path including surveying with wireline.
Under-Reaming: The operation of increasing the diameter of the wellbore of a previously drilled interval which is greater than the diameter of the
previously set casing using an under-reamer. (This does not include "opening hole" which is covered by a primary code of that name above.)
Wait: The act of Waiting and all operations preparing the rig Wait due to an uncontrolled event (e.g.: due to weather, an Incident or logistical
problem). (Suspension of operations).
Wireline: All operations involving the running of tools into the well on wireline apart from wellbore directional surveys. This includes electrical logging
and slickline tools. Note: The purpose of wireline operations are covered in the secondary codes.

122 161
Ø Secondary Codes
The Secondary Codes describe the reason for the operations being conducted i.e.: why you are doing what you are doing. The codes are presented
in alphabetical order, as they will appear in the GRS programme.
Note: Only those codes relevant to the selected Primary Code will appear in the pick lists.
Abandon/Suspend: The reason for Operations involved in Abandoning or Suspending Wells e.g.: cementing, pulling casing, RIH, POOH.
BHA: The reason for Operations involving work with or due to changes to the Bottom Hole Assembly e.g.: Pick-up, lay-down, RIH, POOH, Reaming
(stiffer), flow check etc.
Bit: The reason for Operations involving work with or due to changes to the Bit e.g.: RIH, POOH, Reaming (gauge).
BOP: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the BOP as the reason for corrective or
preventative maintenance.
BOP Controls: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the BOP Controls as the reason for
corrective or preventative maintenance.
BOP/Riser: The reason for operations involving the BOP or Riser e.g.: Nipple-up/down, Run/Pull Riser, Pressure Testing etc.
C&K Manifold: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Choke & Kill Manifold as the
reason for corrective or preventative maintenance.
Casing: The reason for operations involving Casing e.g.: Run/Pull casing, Rig up/down, RIH, POOH (to run casing), cementing, pressure testing etc.
Cementing: The reason for operations involving all Cementing operations apart from cementing casing e.g.: Rig up/down, circulating, RIH/POOH (to
cement) etc.
Cementing Casing: The reason for operations involving cementing casing e.g.: rig up/down, circulating, operate downhole equipment etc.
Client Equipment: The reason for other repairs (including other service company equipment)
Conditioning Mud: The reason for operations involving the need to condition mud e.g.: RIH, POOH, Circulate.
Coring: The reason for operations involving coring (apart from actual coring - see "making hole" secondary code e.g.: POOH, RIH, Pick up/lay down,
Reaming, Circulating etc.
Deck/Cargo Cranes: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Cranes as the reason for
Directional Drilling: The reason for operations required for Directional Drilling other than drilling itself e.g.: Orientate, cementing (kick off), surveying,
wireline (steering), RIH/POOH.
Displacing Mud: The reason for operations involved in Displacing Mud to the well e.g. : circulating, RIH, POOH, Flow Check.
Diverter: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Diverter as the reason for corrective or
preventative maintenance.
Downhole Equipment: The reason for operations involving specialised Downhole Equipment e.g.: RIH, POOH, Operate Downhole Equipment. Also
on of the reasons for Fishing where Downhole Equipment has been lost in the hole.
Downhole Equipment Failure: The reason for operations resulting from the Failure of Downhole Equipment i.e.: POOH, RIH, circulating, pull
casing.
DP Problems/Drive Off: The reason operations resulting from DP Problems or a Drive Off situation is the root cause.
Drawworks: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Drawworks as the reason for
Drill Floor Equipment: The reason for operations involving Drill Floor Equipment. e.g.: rig up/down, pressure testing etc. Additionally one of the
reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the cranes as the reason for corrective or preventative
maintenance.
Drill Out Casing/Cement: The reason for "Drilling" involving specifically Drilling Out of Cement in the casing or the Casing Floats and Shoe
Drill Out Cement Plug: The reason for "Drilling" involving specifically Drilling Out of Cement where a cement plug has been set.
Drill Pipe: The reason for operations involving specifically drill pipe i.e.: Pick up, Lay down.
Drillstring: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Drillstring as the reason for
Force Majeure: The reason for operations resulting from a Force Majeure situation i.e.: Waiting. (In this case "Waiting" primary code will include all
operations required to make the well and rig safe).
Formation Evaluation: The reason for all operations involved in the Evaluation of the Formations being drilled or tested e.g.: Coring, Wireline,
Reaming (MWD), RIH, POOH, circulating (for samples), Rig up/down, pressure testing, flow well etc. Note : All Operations under "Well Testing" Main
code are codes for formation evaluation in the data base.
Hole Cleaning: The reason for all operations required to Clean the Hole i.e.: RIH, POOH, Circulating, Jetting. Note: This will include removal of
cuttings from the well and clean up of well prior to testing or completion etc.

123 161
Hole Condition: The reason for operations resulting from poor hole conditions, i.e.: tight hole, mud losses, cavings etc e.g.: Circulating, POOH,
RIH, reaming, Pull Casing.
Incident/Accident: The reason for operations required in the event of an Incident or Accident i.e.: POOH, RIH, Circulating and Wait.
Landing String: The reason for operations required in the running or pulling of a landing string (casing or liner) i.e.: RIH, POOH.
Leak Off Test: One of the reasons for pressure testing - to determine the strength of the formation exposed beneath the last set casing/liner shoe.
Legs: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Legs of the rig as the reason for
Liner: The reason for operations involved in running/pulling a Liner in the well (excluding running/pulling the landing string) i.e.: Run Casing, Pull
Casing, Operate Downhole Equipment (setting hanger and packer).
Iron Roughneck: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Iron Roughneck as the
Making Hole: The Main reason for "Drilling". To be used when drilling new formation either in Drilling Main Code or in Side-Tracking Main Code.(
Rotary or slide mode).
Marine Drilling Riser: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Marine Drilling Riser as
the reason for corrective or preventative maintenance.
Mooring/Station Keeping: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Mooring/Station
Keeping equipment as the reason for corrective or preventative maintenance.
Motion Compensator: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Motion Compensator
equipment as the reason for corrective or preventative maintenance.
Mud Process System: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Mud Process System
(shakers, agitators, pipework etc.) as the reason for corrective or preventative maintenance. Note: Mud Pumps have a separate secondary code.
Mud Pumps: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Mud Pumps as the reason for
Other Drill Floor: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies Other Drill Floor (tongs,
mechanical slips, tuggers etc…) as the reason for corrective or preventative maintenance.
Other Mech/Elect Faults: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies Other Faults not covered
under other equipment groupings (specifically Power: Controls & Circuitry, Engines, Generators) as the reason for corrective or preventative
maintenance.
Perforating: The reason for operations involving Perforating the casing/liner to allow hydrocarbons to flow into the well. e.g.: Pick-up/lay down, flow
check, safety drill, wireline, operate downhole equipment, flow well etc.
Pipe Handling Equipment: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies Pipe Handling
Equipment as the reason for corrective or preventative maintenance.
Power: Controls & Circuitry: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies Power: Controls &
Circuitry (SCR’s, Electrical motors, switches, breakers, etc…) as the reason for corrective or preventative maintenance.
Power: Engines: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies Power: Engines (Prime
Movers…) as the reason for corrective or preventative maintenance.
Power: Generators: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies Power: Generators as the
Precautionary: The reason for operations where Precaution is advisable in certain circumstances i.e.: flow check, Reaming.
Pressure Testing: The reason for operations required to undertake Pressure Testing (excluding Leak off Test) e.g.: Rig up/ lay down, RIH, POOH,
circulating, cementing (plugs), operate downhole equipment, flow check etc.
Rig Equipment: The reason for operations involving rig equipment e.g. : rig up/down.
Routine: The Reason for operations involving Routine events e.g.: Safety Drills, Jetting, Jack-up/down, pre-load, etc.
Sand Control: The reason for operations involved in Sand Control e.g.: under-reaming, rig up/down, RIH, POOH, circulating, operate downhole
equipment, function testing etc.
Station Keeping/Mooring/Jacking: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies Station
Keeping, Mooring or Jacking as the reason for corrective or preventative maintenance.
Transocean Equipment: The reason for Waiting where unavailability of Transocean Equipment is the root cause.
Transocean Personnel: The reason for Waiting where unavailability of Transocean Personnel (or sub-contracted personnel) is the root cause (i.e.
Strike).
Self Propelled: Used to describe the Moving mode of Self Propelled units.
Service Company Equipment: The reason for Waiting where unavailability of Service Company Equipment (non Transocean Sub-contracted) is the
root cause.
Squeeze: The reason for operations required to squeeze cement to the formation (for remedial or isolation work). e.g. : Rig up/lay down, POOH,
RIH, Operate Downhole Equipment etc.

124 161
Stimulation: The reason for operations involving Stimulation of the reservoir formation to improve productivity of hydrocarbons (fracturing, acidising
etc.) e.g. : Rig up/lay down, RIH/POOH, circulating, cementing, operate downhole equipment, safety drill, wireline, pressure testing etc.
Stuck Pipe: The reason for "fishing" or "wireline" operations required to recover Stuck Pipe.
Survey: The reason for operations required to undertake a Survey (either for rig positioning, sea bed or downhole directional surveys) e.g.:
Orientate, rig up/rig down, RIH, POOH, circulating etc.
Top Drive: One of the reasons for preventative and corrective maintenance. This code specifically identifies the Top Drive as the reason for
Tripping: The reason for operations required prior to Tripping Operations i.e. : circulate (bottoms up), flow check.
Tubing: The reason for operations required to run or pull tubing to complete or test a well e.g. : Pick up/lay down, RIH, POOH, circulating, pressure
testing, wireline (slickline) etc.
Under Tow: Used to describe the moving mode of rigs Under Tow
Waiting on Boats: The reason for Waiting where unavailability of Boats is the root cause.
Wait on Cement: The reason for Waiting when Cement is required to be set before proceeding with the next operation. Only associated with
"Cementing" primary code.
Wait on Daylight: The reason for Waiting when Daylight is required to conduct Safe operations. (e.g. Spud well - shallow gas, flow well for well
testing).
Waiting on Other Transocean Sub Con: The reason for Waiting where unavailability of Transocean Sub Contractor’s Equipment is the root cause.
Waiting on Client/Client S.Con: The reason for Waiting where unavailability of Client’s or Client’s Sub Contracted Equipment or Personnel is the
root cause.
Waiting of Transocean/Partners: The reason for Waiting where situations arise (other than unavailability of equipment or personnel) which delay
operations due to Transocean and Partners.
Washout: The reason for operations required to identify and rectify the situation when a Washout occurs in the drill string and re-commence normal
operations i.e.: POOH, RIH.
Weather: The reason for Waiting when Bad Weather is the root cause and the operations required to secure the well and the rig and resume normal
operations i.e.: POOH, RIH.
Well Control: The reason for operations required to control the well in the event of a Well Control situation and to resume normal operations e.g. :
circulating, cementing, rig up/rig down etc. Also used to identify reason for Well Control Safety Drill.
Well/Section TD: The reason for operations specifically undertaken when Section or Well TD is reached i.e. : POOH, surveying.
Wellhead: Reason for operations involving the Wellhead and associated equipment (packoffs etc) e.g.: Nipple Up/Nipple Down, RIH/POOH,
surveying (orientation), operate downhole equipment, pressure testing, jetting etc.
Wiper Trip: Reason for operations required to conduct a wiper trip i.e. : POOH, RIH.
Wireline: Reasons for operations involving Wireline Equipment i.e. : Pressure testing, Rig up/Rig Down.
Xmas Tree: The reason for operations involving the Xmas Tree i.e. : Nipple Up/Nipple Down, pressure test, function test.

125 161
Ø Operational Codes - Express
Express Class units have one central rotary location where the main operational and revenue generating activity is concentrated. Support for this
central location is two ‘support’ mouse hole locations, the Starboard & Port Mousehole locations. Operational codes for the Express Class units
include codes that can link Main and support operation together or keep them separated.
Central Rotary Location: Operations for this location will always be recorded in the Main Operations Breakdown. In addition to the 10 Main codes
are the following:
Starboard Mousehole
Port Mousehole
If operations at the rotary table ARE NOT dependent on the support operations, then the standard 9 Main Codes are applicable with the primary and
Secondary codes following suit.
If operations at the rotary table ARE dependent on the support operation, (either the Port or Starboard Mousehole), then the focus of the operational
and revenue generating activity moves to the Mousehole locations. In this case, the Main Code would be either Port or Starboard Mousehole.
Primary and Secondary Codes available would then apply specifically to the operations at the Mousehole.
Mousehole Location: Operations for the Mousehole locations will always be recorded in the Support Operation Breakdown. Main Code for these
locations can only be:
Normal Operations: The mouseholes are operating in their ‘Normal’ capacity. They provide support to the central rotary location. The central
rotary location is not dependent or ‘waiting’ on the Mousehole location to deliver.
Critical Operations: The mouseholes are operating directly in the ‘Critical Path’. The central rotary location is dependent or is ‘waiting’ on the
Mousehole location to deliver.
Primary and Secondary Codes available would then apply specifically to these main codes at the Mousehole.
Ø Operational Codes - Enterprise
Enterprise Class units can have two central rotary locations; Forward (Fwd) and Aft, and a Mousehole location (Fwd or Aft) where each of the
locations can have the focus of the main operational and revenue generating activity. Though a period of time, the operational and revenue
generating focus can move from one location to another and back again a number of times each day.
Enterprise class dual activity reporting from Main/Support rotary centers to Forward/Aft rotary centers. On each operational line in the Operations
breakdown, the user will need to specify whether the operations are main or support.
When the operations are defined as ‘Main’ the Operational Codes remains the same as per the standard rig configuration.
When the operations are defined as ‘Support’ the Main Code will always be Multiactivity. Primary and Secondary Codes available would then apply
specifically to this main Multiactivity code.
Ø Operational Codes - Event Reports
In the course of detailing the Units’ 24 hour operation in the Operation Breakdown, GRS provides the ability to link an Event Report with one singular
or multiple operations. By providing the link, automatically the Event report is updated with the date and time of the Event, and at the bottom of the
DOR I report, there will be a summary of any events that were recorded and linked to operations for that day.
All categories of OER can be linked to the Operations Breakdown. There are two method by which a link can be made.
Operational Codes: Select the Main Code as usual. Select ‘Corrective Maintenance’ for the Primary code. Secondary Code will provide a choice of
equipment groups. There are similar groups to that defined in the Equipment Configuration located in the Rig Information section.
On the basis of selecting a set of codes where the Primary code is corrective maintenance, the IADC code will automatically show as ‘8’ and an
Event Report Log will appear.
• as detailed in the Event Reporting procedure. Many fields will be preset on the basis of information already inserting in the operations breakdown.
Once the Report is completed, click OK and the Operations breakdown screen will re appear. Against the particular operation declared as
‘Corrective Maintenance’, the unique event report number will be displayed, confirming the link between the operation and an event report exists.
• If the Event has been previously defined and the operation is a continuation of the Event, click on the particular Event and then click on ‘Select
for Operation Breakdown’. This will open the particular Event for review. Click OK and the Operations breakdown screen will re appear. Against
the particular operation declared as ‘Corrective Maintenance’, the unique event report number will be displayed, confirming the link between the
operation and an event report exists.
The NPT Summary Report will only display recorded Downtime events which are linked to an Operation within the Operational Breakdown.

126 161
Ø Pump Data Record
Pump Data Record: Flowrate can either be calculated through SPM or can be directly entered as a single value. Only where there are white boxes
can information be entered into the screen. The blue blocked boxes are defaulted from information entered in Mud Pumps screen. The user has
defined the pump liner size, stroke length & efficiency. (Note if you change Mud pump liner size you must go back to the Mud Pumps screen and
change the information)
Flowrate: If you only enter a value, the same value will appears on the DOR Part2. Should the user select to determine Flowrate through SPM
calculation, the value in the box will change to the new calculated value.
SPM: Enter the Strokes Per Minute (SPM) that the mud pumps were doing whilst doing the operation. From information detailed of the Rigs Mud
Pumps, the flowrate value will change to the calculated value.
Refresh Pump Data: This button is to update the info when you have change the info in from Mud Pumps.

Ø Product Inventory
Product Inventory links back to Products Database in which you have chosen certain products to be shown in the Marine report and’/or in the Mud
report. If the products have NOT been defined in the Products Database, then they will not be available for the Mud Report. Click the cursor on the
underlined blue word Products and "Mud Input screen" will appear.
Use the drop down menu in the Product column to select the items you have got on board and you will have to enter them as received. After the
initial set-up then the stock received / Return / Rig Used (all white boxes) should easily be followed to give the correct totals. Once the product is
chosen in the future reports the product will be coloured blue. You may choose other items using the white box at the bottom of the list and the drop
down menu. They must have been defined in the Products Database before they can be selected.
Delete: click the cursor on the line you wish to delete then, click delete button, line will delete.
Add: This button automatically makes the cursor jump to the place to select a new entry.


127 161
10. Well Runs

Ø Well Run
In the navigation panel, click on the words ‘New Run’. A Question box will appear asking "Are you sure you want to create a new Run".
OK: Click ‘OK’ will create a New Run ‘Run X’ in the GRS tree below the words New Run.
To proceed with the run information click on the ‘Run x’ and you will see three files appear
• Bit Record
• Pipe Tally Report
• BHA Report
Ø Bit Record
If you have a new bit, you should enter your bit information in the Tubular inventory prior to enter bit record, this will make it easier to select the bit.
When a new run is created, there is no bit declared for the run. Hence, when the user selects the Bit Record for the first time, a dialogue box will
appear stating:
"Selected Run has no Bit declared. You have to define a Bit".
Click OK and the Bit Log will appear.

If a bit has been declared for the run, the Bit Data Record will appear immediately.
Ø Bit Log
This shows you a list with the Well /Run /Bit information.
Re-Run: If you wish to Re-Run a bit then select the bit by clicking on the line of the selection and you will see an > arrow appear on the left hand side
of the screen. Then once the RE-Run is selected a Dialogue screen will appear asking you to confirm "Confirm Re-Running of Bit # X" Or tell you no
bit declared to Re-run.
New Bit: If selected a Dialogue screen will appear asking you to confirm "Creation of a new Bit"
Click OK Will a possibly do 2 things
1. A Dialogue screen will appear stating:
"No Bit declared in Tubular Inventory. Edit this screen and record the Bits".
Click OK will exit screen. So as the statement requests you must go to the Tubular Inventory, select ‘Equipment Type: Bits’ & enter the
necessary information. Return to Bit Record to restart the process.
2. A Dialogue screen will appear telling you "Confirm Creation of a new Bit"
Cancel: Goes back to the Bit Log.

OK: Goes to the Bit Data Record.

128 161
Ø Bit Data Record
Bit No./Run No: Previous records for the ‘Well’ will define these.
Serial No.: The drop down menu will give you the selection of bits you have declared in the Tubular Inventory.
Size: This may default from you choice of Serial No. You can also type in as required.
Manufacturer: Enter as required.
Type: Enter the Bit type.
IADC Code: If known enter the IADC bit code.
Core Number: Enter the sequential core run number for the well.
Depth In: This is defined elsewhere. File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Well "xxxxxx"/ Well Days/Daily Operations Report.
Depth Out: This is defined elsewhere. File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Well "xxxxxx"/ Well Days/Daily Operations Report
Nozzle Size: The number you type is of a 32nd so if you type 20 it represents 20/32nd’s.Type in the correct number for each nozzle, up to 12 nozzles
available.
Rotating Hours: This is defined elsewhere. File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Well "xxxxxx"/ Well Days/Daily Operations Report
Average ROP: This is defined elsewhere. File Path: GRS rig / Rig selected/Well "xxxxxx"/ Well Days/Daily Operations Report
Dull Bit Grading: This is the standard IADC bit grading system. To select, use the drop down menu’s in each box which will display the standard
IADC dull coding.
Re/Run/New Bit: This on screen button takes you to the Bit Log.


129 161
Ø Pipe Tally
Before attempting to generate a Pipe tally Report for the particular run, the following should have been completed:
1. In the Rig Identification Screen, the Top Drive or Kelly has been selected and the appropriate lengths for the Drilling Pup or Kelly entered.
2. BHA for the particular run has been created. This will define a BHA length that is used in the calculation of the Drill Pipe length.
3. Drill Pipe to be used in the Pipe Tally has been declared as Derrick/Deck in the Tubular Riser Report
If these above items have not been addressed the following warning will show:
‘Pipe Tally could not be generated.
Then following data have to be input prior to generating the Pipe Tally report.’
Click OK, closes screen with no action taken.
Click on ‘Pipe Tally’ on the GRS Navigation section:

If a Pipe Tally has already been created for the particular run, then the Pipe Tally Report will be displayed.
If no Pipe Tally has been created for the particular run, then the Pipe Tally Configuration screen will be displayed.
Ø Pipe Tally Configuration
If no Pipe Tally has been crated for the particular run, then the following Pipe Tally Configuration screen will be displayed. The screen is designed to
present all available DP and HWDP tubulars recorded in the Tubular Riser Report in a format that will allow the simple creation of a Drill Pipe string.
Once the overall configuration of the string is confirmed, the calculation of the Drill Pipe Tally can be made.
DP Joints Characteristics: If two or three ranges are defined in the Tubular Riser Report there will be a separate line for the user to detail.
Ave length: Average length of joint. Used to calculate estimated Drill Pipe sting length.
Ave ID: Ave ID of Joint.
Joints per stand: Used to set up the calculated pipe tally report based on the range of pipe used.
Estimated TD of the section must be deeper than total length of DP+BHA.
Copy Joints from last Report: You can copy the joints from your last report, which will remove any joints that you have entered prior to this

130 161
‘On Deck’ & ‘In the Hole’: These two windows display tubular information as defined in the Tubular Description . The number of DP and HWDP
joints are derived from the Tubular Riser Report . Movement for the pipe from the ‘Deck’ to the ‘Hole’ are undertaken via the ‘Add’, ‘Insert’ and
‘Remove’ buttons.
• Add: Highlight the pipe you want to add and click on Add, a pop up window will show and ask you to choose the number of pipe you want to
add, insert the number of joints and click ok.
• Insert: Choose the pipe you want to insert and highlight a line in the "in the hole" section, your tubular will be inserted above the highlighted line.
• Remove: Highlight the pipe you want to remove and click on remove, a pop up window will show and ask you to choose the number of pipe
you want to remove, insert the number of joints and click ok
Note: If you have the incorrect number of joints ‘In the Hole’, best practice is to remove the entire number of joints and reinsert them with the correct
number.
Calculate: Once the configuration screen is configured to the satisfaction of the user, click ‘Calculate’ to generate a Pipe Tally Report .
Cancel: exit without saving
Ø Pipe Tally Report
If a Pipe Tally has already been created for the particular run, or the user has pushed the ‘Calculate’ button on the Pipe Tally Configuration screen,
then the following Pipe Tally Report will be displayed.
Each stand length is totaled and each stand length in turn is added to the BHA. Finally the length of the Kelly or drilling pup length is included in the
final tally. Each Pipe length can now be adjusted and corrected individually to the correct length.
Date / BHA Length / Run # will All Default.

131 161
Depth In.: This initially will show you the defaulted depth from the Pipe Tally Configuration. Go back to the Pipe Tally Configuration to change if
required.
Total PT Length: Calculated string length as detailed in the Pipe Tally Configuration. Go back to the Pipe Tally Configuration to change if required.
Changes made in the Length column of the Pipe Tally report will be reflected in this value
Report Configuration: Returns user to the Pipe Tally Configuration screen.
Length: The ‘Ave length’ defined on the Pipe Tally Configuration will be displayed here. These cells are white ad write enabled. Insert actual
strapped length.
Comments: In this area you can type any information i.e. next to where you pass a restriction you may wish to comment.
Report configuration: The first time the Tally screen is opened, the tally will be calculated on the basis of the parameters detailed above. This then
becomes the ‘Report’. Clicking OK or Cancel does not recalculate but simply save existing setting (OK) or exit without saving (Cancel) on the Tally
screen. Click Report Configuration if any of the following parameters need to be or have changed:
• Drilling Pup/Kelly length changed.
• BHA has been changed.
• Drill Pipe need changes.
• Depth In has changed
Check Spelling: Will check spelling in Comments
Print: Will print the Report

Preview: Shows you the print preview
Cancel: Exit screen without saving updated data
Insert: for inserting Subs or Crossovers in string, it will open a box where you can choose items from Tubular inventory
Delete: Choose the pipe or Cross over and click Delete, it removes the item and recalculate.
Joint Calc: It will view length calculation of each joint, click again and it show only calculation for each Std.
.

132 161
Ø BHA Report
Select BHA Report and the BHA Report will appear on your screen. Fields defined as follows:
Rig Name /Well Name /Operator /Run # / Bit # /RKB to SB / RKB to WH. These all will default and as you see are blue blocked so you cannot
change them in this report.
Date: Click on the white box and a calendar will appear select the date.
WT Above Jars: Enter the amount in the defined units.
WT Below Jars: Enter the amount in the defined units.
DP Type: Click on box reveals a drop down menu select an option.
Type: You can enter the type of BHA i.e. Pendulum. Kick- off.
Measured Depth: Enter the Depth in (depth at which it tag bottom). Enter in the defined units.
Bit Information: Bit information will default from the Bit report defined under the same run number the BHA Report is defined under.
Item: The item is the number give to each piece of equipment as you select the components of the BHA you can edit these this then links to the
Reorder button. This takes the Item numbers and reorders then in sequential order 1,2,3,4,5…
• As equipment is first entered into the BHA, the Item number will automatically be assigned in sequential order.
• If you require item 5 to be item 2, change item 5 to 2 and click on reorder. The BHA order will reflect the new Item sequential
numbering.
• This may need to be done if you have deleted an item. You will be missing that item number the reorder generates the new numbers
from the top down.
Description: This has a drop down menu select an option (The options available are linked to the Equipment Type you have defined through the
Tubular Inventory).
S/N: This has a drop down menu to select an option. Notice once the serial number is selected the following information defaults from the tubular
Inventory.
Length /OD / ID /Lower Thread/Upper Thread / FN Length /FN ID/FN OD. Default from the Tubular Inventory.

133 161
Total: This is the running cumulative total of the BHA.
Comments: Here you can type in any comments i.e. ‘Totco ring Installed’. or ‘Float Installed’.
Edition of BHA Elements: If a BHA element requires to be inserted in the report, but it has not been entered into Tubular inventory, do the following:
• Select equipment type. If the equipment type is not available go to the Tubular Inventory screen to include.
• Click on ‘Add item to inventory’ button. The Tubular Inventory screen will appear with one line only. Fill in the necessary information. Minimum
required information is ‘S/N’ & ‘Nominal OD’. Click OK on the Tubular inventory to close the screen and return to the BHA report. BHA report will
display the new element. This element has also been saved in the Tubular Inventory.
Should you wish to update any field of a particular Tubular Element in the BHA report, click in the blue portion of the BHA element. The Tubular
Inventory screen will appear with one line only containing information already saved. Make the necessary amendments. Minimum required
information is ‘S/N’ & ‘Nominal OD’. Click OK on the Tubular inventory to close the screen and return to the BHA report. BHA report will display the
amended element. This element has also been updated in the Tubular Inventory.
Add Item to Inventory: Should there be a BHA element that does not exist in the Tubular Inventory:
• Select the correct equipment description from the drop down box. If the equipment description does not exist, then you will need to exit
the BHA report, open up the Tubular Inventory and create a new Equipment type.
• Click on the ‘Add Item to Inventory’ button. The Tubular Inventory screen will appear with one line only for inserting the necessary
information. Click OK.
• New information will be inserted and displayed in the BHA.
Print: Will print the Report
Preview: Shows you the print preview.
Reorder: This takes the Item numbers and reorders then in sequential order 1,2,3,4,5…
• As equipment is first entered into the BHA, the Item number will automatically be assigned in sequential order.
• If you require item 5 to be item 2, change item 5 to 2 and click on reorder. The BHA order will reflect the new Item sequential
numbering.
• This may need to be done if you have deleted an item. You will be missing that item number the reorder generates the new numbers
from the top down.
Copy/New BHA: Takes you to the BHA Log.
Select to copy: If you want to move or copy an item in the BHA you click on Select to copy and then choose the item by placing the cursor on it and
click the Mouse, You will see that the button have changed to Copy, click on Copy and then place the cursor where you want to copy it, the button
have changed to Insert, click insert, this is the same button
Rotate: Place cursor anywhere on a particular record in the BHA. Click the mouse and a small (>) will appear on the left-hand side of the record.
Click rotate and you will see Lower and Upper Threads change place.
Insert: This will insert after you have selected a particular record in the BHA shown by the arrow > that appears in the left-hand side of the screen. It
inserts an empty line above your selected item.
Delete: Place cursor anywhere on a particular record in the BHA. Click the mouse and a small (>) will appear on the left-hand side of the record.
Click ‘Delete’ button and record will delete.
Check spelling: Will check the spelling in Comments
Insert DP: Can only be used after you have created Pipe Tally, Opens the Pipe tally so you can choose Pipe to enter in the BHA
Ø BHA Log
Copy: To copy a BHA you must first select a particular record. Click the mouse and a small (>) will appear on the left-hand side of the record. Click
‘copy’ button and you will get the same BHA you had before.
New BHA: Takes you back to the BHA Report.
Cancel: Exits the screen back to you previous screen.

134 161
11. Data Analysis

Ø Departmental Activity: Keyword Search
Use this search engine to locate any given Departmental Activity Report within a given period and given department by typing in a string of
characters that defines the search. Example below shows the string scr typed in. It denotes that the search engine has attempted and successfully
located one report in the electrical department between the dates 01-Jan-2001 and 04-Dec-2001 containing the string or word scr, which is
displayed in Results.
Rig Name: Select from drop down list and click on rig name.
Date From: Click on blank space to bring up pop-up calendar. Select desired date from pop-up calendar.
Date To: Click on blank space to bring up pop-up calendar. Select desired date from pop-up calendar.
Department: Select from drop down list and click on desired department. Drop down list of available departments will only display if the Date From
& Date To fields are filled out.
Search For: Enter a string of characters to define your search.
Results: Displays Departmental Activity Reports that contain character strings defined in the Search For field. Displays results by date of the
specific Departmental Activity Report that contains the string.
View Report: Highlight desired date and click View Report. Displays Departmental Activity Report for the specific date requested.
Cancel: Exit screen without any further action.

135 161
Ø Department Activity: Search for Policy and Procedure Feedback
Policy and Procedure Feedback system was implemented in GRS Version 3.0 so that issuance, receival and action of Policies and procedure could be
followed through. This feedback register provides the ability to verify, by the region or Corporate, that the implementation of the P&P has taken place.
A search tool is included to allow prompt retrieval of a specific document or action recorded in GRS. This tool is included in the Departmental Activity
Search screen as below.
Search Criteria: Place character strings or tick action boxes to define your search criteria.
Results: Displays Feedback items that contain character strings defined in the Search For fields. Displays results by date of the specific Feedback
item that contains the defined criteria.
View Report: Highlight desired date and click View Report. Displays Feedback item for the specific date requested.
Ø Departmental Activity Consolidation
This utility presents a way of displaying all Departmental Activity Reposts by Department within a given period of time defined by Date From and
Date To. It is a tool that is intended to assist in the handover process. Printed "Consolidated Departmental Activity" report is displayed in date
sequence.
Department: Select from drop down list and click on desired department. Drop down list of available departments will only display if the Date From
& Date To fields are filled out.
Consolidate Report: Click to view report

136 161
Ø Performance Tracking
This section has been developed solely to allow the user to analyze the data that has been gathered. There are options provided to allow quick
searches for information that is required for reference or other uses.
The accuracy of the Performance Tracking facility in GRS is solely dependent on the accuracy for reporting. Little effort in detailing operations in the
operations breakdown will result in meaningless and untrustworthy information.
Due to the large TRANSOCEAN fleet size and variations in Client requirements around the world, the performance tracking utility allows the
extraction of requested data from rigs and wells recorded in GRS and present it in a simple table format. If further specific analysis, trending or
charting is required, export to MS Excel is available.
Output from GRS is dependent on the definition of a single Performance Set. A number of specific Performance Sets can be defined in GRS.
Under each Performance Set, a number of Operation Sets are defined to provide greater flexibility in what can be reported through each
Performance Set.
Performance sets are created through the Performance Tracking Setup.
Output from GRS using specific a Performance Set is available through the Performance Tracking Report.
Ø Performance Tracking: Setup
Output from GRS is dependent on the definition of a single Performance Set. A number of specific Performance Sets can be defined in GRS.
Under each Performance Set, a number of Operation Sets are defined to provide greater flexibility in what can be reported through each
Performance Set. An Operation Set is a number of related operations that are reported as a group on a per well or per section basis, and on a time
or rate basis.
Each Performance set can be created to review areas of particular interest:
For example:
• A Performance set can be created to review Tripping times for the by the Driller or TP. Two operational sets can be declared in this Performance
set to detail Tripping times on a TIME basis and a RATE basis.
• A Performance set can be created to review BOP Running and Pulling times for the Subsea Supervisor. Two operational sets can be declared in
this Performance set to detail Running and Pulling times during Drilling Operations and during Completion or Workover Operations.
• A Performance set can be created fro the OIM to include all the above Operational plus others.
GRS is loaded with a default Performance Set that contains typical Operational Sets and will result in the generation of a report displaying typical
information that is normally reviewed on a drilling unit.

137 161
Click on Performance Tracking: Setup and the Performance Set Definition screen will appear.
Performance Set: Select from drop down list and click on desired performance set.
Add: Enter the name of new Performance set in pop up Box.
Rename: Enter new name of the Performance set in pop up Box.
Delete: Delete the highlighted Performance set.

138 161
Operations Set: Displays Operational sets declared against the Performance Set defined above.
Add: Enter the name of new Operation set in pop up box.
Delete: Select the desired operation set to be deleted and click "Delete"
Edit Current: Edits an existing Operational set. Place cursor anywhere on a particular Operational Set in the Operational Set box. Click the mouse
and a small (>) will appear on the left hand side of the record. Then click Edit Current. This will bring up a screen called Operation Set Edition.
Operation Set Name can be amended.

Check how the Operational set will be reported: Per Well or Per Section
Rate or Time
"Time" removes the "Feet/h" or "Meters/h" option.
Main Activity: Select from drop down list and click on desired Main Activity
Primary Activity: Select from drop down list and click on desired Primary Activity.
Secondary Activity: Select from drop down list and click on desired Secondary Activity.

139 161
Ø Performance Tracking: Report
Rig Name: Check box for desired rig. Displays all rigs as defined on the GRS database. Rig personnel will have one rig unit that can be reviewed.
Rig Manager can have multiple rig units that can be reviewed.
Rig/Well Name: Check box for desired Rig/Well Name. Displays all well as defined on the GRS database. Rig personnel will have multiple wells that
can be reviewed. Rig Manager can have multiple wells across multiple rigs that can be reviewed.
Performance Set: Select from drop down list and click on desired Performance Set. Only one Performance set can be used to extract information
from GRS. To update the Performance set, go to Performance Tracking Setup.
OK: Click "OK" to view Tabular Report.

140 161
Ø Performance Tracking: Tabular Report
Displays output on query to GRS Database based on criteria defined in Performance Tracking Report.
• Operation Set column displays all Operational sets defined for the Performance set and shows the format units defined.
• Each well is detailed per column. If there is no value next to each operation, the operation did not exist in the well.
Edit Operation: Click on a particular operation value in a well column that needs to be reviewed. With that cell the focus, click on Edit Operation and
the Performance Tracking: Edit Operations screen will appear. Can only edit operations for a specific Operational Three code combination. Cannot
edit operations for an entire Operation set.
Only text in italics are editable for edit operation.
Export To Excel: This button converts the Tabular Report to .xls format (Excel) for further specific analysis, trending or charting.
Close: Exit screen without any further action.

141 161
Ø Performance Tracking: Edit Operations
This utility provides the facility to include of remove a specific operation from the calculation.
For example: In review of ‘Pressure Testing BOP’ there was a specific operation on a particular day when the operation was compromised due to an
equipment issue. It may be felt that this particular operational event should not be included in the performance calculation. Through the Edit
Operation screen, the user can remove the specific operation from the calculation.
The Edit Operations Screen will display all Primary and Secondary Operation codes for a specific Main Operation Code defined in an Operation Set.
By default ALL Operations defined under the Main Operational Code will be selected and calculated to give the result displayed in the Tabular
Report.
To remove the specific operation from the calculation, click on the tick in the Use Op field. The tick will disappear and the operation is removed from
the operation. To reselect, click on the box under the Use Op field.

142 161
Ø Excellence Graph
The excellence graph is a measure rig downtime, TRIR against company downtime and TRIR targets. The graph can display information over a
rolling average period or the year to date. To create a graph simply select either year to date or rolling average in the TRIR Configuration field.
Next select date. Then enter downtime and TRIR objective values in there respective fields. Hit ok to generate the report or cancel to exit the
screen.
Ø Agreements Outputs: Table of Agreements
Click on ‘Table of Agreement’ and the following screen will appear:
Date from/to: Use the calendar function to determine the period the search covers.
Create: Creates a Crystal report output that details all agreements made in the period defined.

143 161
Ø Agreements Outputs: Agreements Categories
As a number of agreements are generated over a period of time, the user may wish to view statistics on what is entered. Agreement categories
provide two outputs: Tabular or Trend. Option provided to consider the top 3 or all agreement categories. Trend output presents the agreements
logged over a period of time
Click on ‘Agreement Categories’ and the following screen will appear:
Date from/to: Use the calendar function to determine the period the search covers.
Report Type: Table or Trend
Create: Creates a Crystal report output that details all agreements made in the period defined.
Ø Productive/Non Productive Time
Generates a Time report, breaking down into the following NPT groups as defined in the Operations Breakdown.
C: Corrective Maintenance: Non Productive time dedicated to downtime on the rig. Corrective action is being undertaken to fix a downtime
event.
O: Operation: Non Productive time dedicated to ongoing operations on the rig. This is used to track more the Client Operational NPT.
Examples include 1) Side tracking to bypass junk in hole. 2) Pull a BHA for Client equipment failure. 3) Pumping LCM due to down hole
losses.
PM: Preventative Maintenance: Non Productive time dedicated to TRANSOCEAN Maintenance of the equipment. Preventative action
being undertaken so to ensure continued operation of equipment. For example, grease the TDS and Slip & Cut.
W: Waiting: Non Productive time dedicated to waiting. For example: Wait on client, WOW, wait on Third Party, etc….
P: Productive Time: Time dedicated to the productive drilling and operations on a well.
Displays as a Pie chart and gives specific Hours and percentage values in a table.
NPT classification associated against the Operational Breakdown three code system can be reviewed and amended to suit the units particular needs
at Operational: Operational Classification.
The Time report can review only one well and either one specific Section or an accumulation of all the wells sections.
Rig Name: Select the desired rig from the drop down list.
Well: Select the desired Well from the drop down list.
Section: Select the desired Section from the drop down list. Can chose ALL or Section number for the particular Well defined.
Calculate: Click on the "Calculate" button to display the report.

144 161
Ø START Cards Statistics
Generates a standard report detailing START card statistics.
Calculate: Click on Calculate button to display START Cards Statistics Report.
Ø FOCUS Status
This utility provides the facility to search and review individual FOCUS reports. It provides the quick identification of outstanding actions. Three
reporting structures are detailed as follows:
-Monthly Analysis of Open Report: Generates a standard report detailing all Open (approved) reports as of the 1st Day of the month.
-Criteria Search: Provides the ability to fine tune search of FOCUS proposals and reports generated on the rig. Many of the fields detailed on the
FOCUS Report section are Criteria controls in this search utility.
-Configuration Report
Ø FOCUS Status: Monthly Analysis of Open Report
This utility generates a standard report detailing all Open (approved) reports as of the 1st Day of the month. It provides a breakdown to the report
types in a graphical and tabular format.
Note: No proposals will be shown. If a proposal was made in the previous month, however approved in the current month, when the user selects a
12 month period up to the current month, this Report will not show as it was not approved by the 1st of the current month.
OK: Click on " OK" button to display Analysis of Open Reports.

145 161
Ø FOCUS Status: Criteria Search
This function is located under both the Operations tab and Data Analysis tab of GRS. Under the Operations tab, “FOCUS Search Criteria” is
available through the FOCUS Report Log Screen under the button “Filter Report”. Under the Data Analysis tab, this function is available as one of
the selections under FOCUS Status as “Criteria Search.” The search function allows the user to locate and sort FOCUS proposals/reports based on
specific criteria selected by the user. The user will be presented with a search configuration window that will allow him/her to create search profiles
that can be used to narrow the search to very specific fields of inquiry.
NOTE: This report is highly dependent on the data being entered correctly in the FOCUS Database.
Each one of the fields under the Search Criteria represents data fields in the FOCUS Proposal/Report. The user has the option to select which fields
they choose to narrow the focus of their search.
Installation/Facility: This field defaults to the Installation for the GRS Rig version.
Report Type: Refers to the type of report that was created either “Corrective” or “Improvement” Action/
Creation Date – From/To: The user can choose dates between a narrow or wide frame of time. When one of the fields is selected, a calendar pop-
up screen will appear allowing the user to accurately and quickly select the appropriate dates.
Target Completion Date – From/To: The user can choose the dates to narrow the search. These dates also include any extensions that may have
been added to an action plan. When one of the fields is selected, a calendar pop-up screen will appear allowing the user to accurately and quickly
select the appropriate dates.
Date Submitted – From/To: The user can choose dates to narrow the search. When one of the fields is selected, a calendar pop-up screen will
appear allowing the user to accurately and quickly select the appropriate dates.
Close Out Date – From/To: The user can choose dates to narrow the search. When one of the fields is selected, a calendar pop-up screen will
appear allowing the user to accurately and quickly select the appropriate dates.
Responsible Department: This field is especially helpful in creating a work list by department that is responsible for the completion of the action
plan.
Core Management Function/Policy Topic: These fields will allow the user to select specific core management functions and the corresponding
policy topic. Please note, the only functions and topics that are part of the record will be included in the drop-down list.
Source of Opportunity/Corrective/Improvement Opportunity Actions: This field corresponds to the “Report Type” field. Choose one to narrow
the search.
Proposal/Report Title: In FOCUS database, this field is a text field. If the end user knows the title of the proposal they are seeking, this field will
provide them with a way to locate a specific report. Because this field represents the corresponding text field in FOCUS, the exact title must be
carefully submitted. Use this field with caution. Alternatively, if one word from a title is submitted, for example, “piping”, then all phrases with piping
in the title will be part of the report generated given the other parameters selected allow for that.
Improvement Category: Provided as a way to classify ideas. This list will only be populated with the ideas that have already been selected in the
FOCUS database.
Improvement Award Level: Award level is 1, 2 or 3 depending on the idea suggested. This list will only be populated with the ideas that have
already been selected in the FOCUS database.
Status: Provides the user with the ability to differentiate between status options available in FOCUS. This is especially a useful tool when creating a
work list or report.
All Reports: Regardless of status, all reports are included in the search.
Open Only: If this is selected, only reports that are “open” will be included in the search.
Overdue Only: Only reports that are overdue will be included in the search. This is a field to select when monitoring to ensure work is being
completed as required and approved.
Waiting Only: This option enables the approving authority (OIM or Rig Manager), to determine proposals awaiting their review and approval.
Referred Only: Selecting this option enables the Rig Manager to determine proposals awaiting his review and approval.
Closed Only: This option includes only reports that have been approved and closed.
Rejected Only: Selecting this option includes only reports that were submitted for approval but were subsequently rejected (not approved).
Priority – Low/Medium/High/Not Applicable: Choosing from one of these options allows the users to develop work lists based on criticality.

146 161
Should Lessons Learned Be Shared Globally? - Worth Sharing/Not Worth/Not Applicable: This field allows the user to differentiate between
lesson learned worth sharing or not. This field can be used by management/supervisors to determine what information in the database is worth
sharing with their crews.
Clear All Filters: Cancels the search criteria selected but keeps the search screen open so that new criteria can be selected.
Create Worklist: Allows the user to develop and print a work list.
Create Report Log: Refines the search for the report log enabling the user to narrow their search for a given proposal/report.
Cancel: Cancels the search and closes the Search screen.
Ø FOCUS Status: FOCUS Configuration Report
NOTE: All fields marked with an * (red asterisk) are mandatory fields that must be filled out.
This function allows the user to generate Crystal Reports related to FOCUS and is able to be extensively configured by the user to suit the rig’s
NOTE: This report is highly dependent on the data being entered correctly in the FOCUS Database.
Report Title: Select an existing report from the drop-down list or create a new one by clicking on "New". This will put the user in *** NEW Mode***
at which time they can type a name for the report in the field.
Copy: A copy can be made of a selected report to eliminate re-entering data for a report the user may want to create that is similar in most respects
to another pre-defined configuration. Select the original report in the drop-down list, click "Copy" and enter a new title. It can then be edited as
required and saved.
Edit Criteria: A report criteria can be edited at any time by selecting it from the drop-down and clicking "Edit", which will put the user in *** EDIT
Criteria Mode *** and allow the properties of the report to be changed. Save these changes or click Cancel to revert to the previous version.
Delete: Select a report criterion from the drop-down to delete it from the list.
To provide a means of sorting and grouping the FOCUS information in the FOCUS Database, there are two levels of control applied:
Primary Control: Select a Primary Control from the list in the drop-down menu and check the boxes in the lower pane as required. These are fixed
selections and cannot be modified; click on the "All" button to check every possible control in the list or "Clear" to remove all checks. The Primary
Control is a mandatory field and at least one control must be selected.
Secondary Control: Select a Secondary Control from the list in the drop-down menu and check the boxes in the lower pane as required. These are
fixed selections and cannot be modified; click on the "All" button to check every possible control in the list or "Clear" to remove all checks.
Report Content: Choose from an extensive list of modifiers to refine the report. As modifiers are added the Total below the pane will increase
depending on the amount of room on the report the data will take. Keep this number below 15,000 to ensure the desired data fits on the report. The
Width for each selection is displayed on the far right and totaled at the bottom.
Sort By: Check a radio button to sort the final report by it’s modifier within each category.
Delete Row: Select a line to remove from the modifier pane and click "Delete Row".
Descriptions: There are a number of large text fields in a FOCUS report that do not present well in a narrow column. The FOCUS Report contains
two fields which accommodate and present these large text fields across the entire width of the report output. Select the FOCUS fields from the drop
down list provided.
As an example above, a report could have a Primary Control as "Report Type" (Corrective Opportunity, Improvement Opportunity) and a Secondary
Control as "Report Status" (All) with Report Content modifiers of "Source of Opportunity", "Work Order ", "Approved Date", etc…sorted by " Source of
Opportunity ". This would give a report broken up into Report Type, and then further subdivided into active and closed.
Report: Click the “Report” button for a report to be generated based on the criteria specified in the FOCUS Report Configuration window. Report
will be generated in Crystal reports.
Report Screen: At the top of the report screen, two icons are visible: a “Print Report” icon and an “Export Report” icon.
NOTE: Available printer shown on Print Screen is the default system printer, but other printers can be selected from this window as well.
Define default system printer though Printer settings in the Windows Control Panel.
Export Report icon: Crystal Reports can also create a file (or digital) version of the report. This digital version can then be sent onwards as an E
Mail attachment.

147 161
Export Format Selection: When the “Export Report” icon is selected, a pop-up menu entitled Export Format Selection Appears with two selections
offered. Select either ‘Adobe *.PDF File’ or ‘MS Excel *.XLS File’.
Save As: After the Export Format Selection is made, another pop-up menu appears entitled, “Save As”. This menu allows the user to browse to a
location they want to save the file in that can later be retrieved for e-mailing, etc.
Ø Well Reports: End Of Well Report
The End of Well Report is automatically created by GRS based on the information that has been entered. The report consists of standard reports and
graphs that are based on the data collected in the database for the duration of the well.
Using this basic report the user will be able to add comments pages and create the final End of Well Reports that can be submitted to the client. It is
necessary to emphasize that due to the different reporting needs of the client, the user is obliged to add or subtract material from the information
presented in the End of Well Report from the GRS program.
Click on End Of Well Report and the End of Well Report screen will appear.
Rig Name: Enter Rig Name from drop down list.

Well Select: Well name from drop down list.
Check Boxes: Check on any or all boxes for desired information to be shown in End Of Well Report.
• Well Summary: This report contains a summary of all the background information that is relevant to the well. The information is
presented to have a general overview of the well that was drilled.
• Well Status: This report contains a summary of all the information that is relevant to each particular section within the well. Includes
important depth milestones, Mud types, Casing and Formation Integrity. Graphical presentations of the Casing structure and Progress
curves are included.
• Time Breakdown Performance Summary: This report contains a summary of all Main, primary and secondary operational code
breakdowns recorded in the work on a particular well. The summary is sorted alphabetically based on the Operational Codes.
• Equipment Downtime Summary: This report contains a summary of all Corrective Action and Waiting recorded in the work on a
well. Similar to the NPT Summary Report.
Appendices
Bit & BHA Report: These reports contain information relating to each run recorded in the work on a particular well. This
information includes Bit information, dull grading, calculated ROP, and BHA items.
Listing of Operations: This report displays the Operations information phase-by-phase and day-by-day. Information is taken from
phase description and operation screen. Reported in chronological order.
Time Breakdown per Family: This report presents a graphical and tabular breakdown of operations per Family in the work on a
particular well. A Family is an alternative grouping of Operational Breakdown codes.
Bulk Products Consumption: This reports Rig bulk product consumption (as reported in the Marine report) during the work on a
particular well. Consumption is displayed on a per section basis (max 12 sections).
Mud Properties vs. Depth: This reports Mud product consumption (as reported in the Mud report) during the work on a particular
well. Consumption is displayed on a per section basis (max 12 sections).
Operations Event Report (DT, MEF): Prints out all Event Reports recorded during the well.
Recordable Incident Reports (MTC, SIC, FAT): Prints out all Incident Reports recorded during the well.
Finish: Click "Finish" to display End Of Well Report on screen prior to printing.
Ø Well Reports: Time / Depth Curve
This well report graphs time (in days) vs depth in meters or feet.
The graph can display time vs depth for Forecast, Target and AFE curves. This can be measured against the actual drilling progress. The progress
is based on figures from operations breakdown in DOR I and also the information entered in Forecast / Target Curves.
To create a Time vs Depth curve select the rig name, then select a well and then hit the add button. If the wrong well is selected, select the well
from the selected wells box and hit remove. To view the report then hit view.

148 161
Ø Well Reports : Well Breakdown
The report produces a excel spreadsheet that depicts the well breakdown per hole section. It shows the total amount of days versus Forecast ,AFE
for both cumulative (total) days and days per section.
The report is created simply by selecting the rig name and then the well name.
Ø Well Reports: List of Operations
The list of operations report produces a list of each of the operations that occurred through the well. This report can be run for a particular well period
or for the duration of the entire well. To create the report simply selecting the rig name and then the well name. The well dates are then displayed
in Date From and Date To: to change the duration of the reports changed the date period. Hit ok to generate the report and cancel to exit.
If the default dates are selected then the entire well operations is reported.
Ø Downtime Criteria Search
This feature allows the user to search for any downtime report entered into GRS. Simply enter any of the search criteria of interest. If any records
are found the related reports appears in the Operations Events Report Log.
To find reports of interest please enter appropriate criteria into the any of the fields below:
Select any of the report type from the drop down list, the options are :
Any
Equipment Failure Report
Major Equipment Failure
Other Event - Client & Others Involved
Other Event – Transocean Involved
Procedural Error / Failure – Transocean Involved
Period: Enter in the time period(dates) that is relevant to the search.
Hours: Enter in the hours the event lasted for, if appropriate. The selection can by greater than, less than or equal to the hours selected. It
can also be between a range of hours. For example to select all reports between 1 hours long and 9 hours long. Select the first drop down
box to "greater to or equal", the second drop down box to "lower than or equal to".
The report status can be any of the following options:
Any
Waiting for approval
Open
Closed
The Equipment type can be found be entering details in any of the following fields:
Equipment Name
PSS (xx-xxx-xx)
Equipment Category
Equipment Sub Category
Manufacture
Model #
S/N
Also the search can be carried out by Word Order # or the Person Making out the report.
Search Button: Launches the search.
Reset: Resets the search criteria.
Close: Closed the screen.

149 161
Free text search will search for any text entered in this box.

150 161
12. Modify List

Ø Tubular Inventory Catalogue
Tubular Inventory Catalogue in which you enter you Tubulars information in the appropriate column. Default list available upon set up of GRS. For
additional tubular measurements enter as follows:
Nominal OD: Enter the nominal Outside Diameter. Enter Decimal Units only (3.00), not fractions (6 ½).
ID: Enter the Internal Diameter. Enter Decimal Units only (3.00), not fractions (6 ½).
Wt/per length: Enter the Nominal wt. Enter Decimal Units only (3.00), not fractions (6 ½).
Delete Line click the cursor on the line you wish to delete then, click delete line button on far left of screen, line will delete.
Ø Riser Catalogue
Riser Catalogue: in which you enter you Riser information in the appropriate column .
OD: Click on Drop down menu, default is set to 24", 21", 18.625 & 16".
Wall Thickness: Enter the Wall thickness of the riser joint. Enter decimals only, not fractions
Wt in Air: Enter the weight per joint in Air. The weight recorded is the total joint wt, not wt per length.
Ø Modify List - Grades
Modify List – Grade: Accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Grade’ .
Grade: Default list available upon set up of GRS. For additional Grades, enter you Grade information.
Add Item: This button automatically makes the cursor jump to the place to make a new entry.
Ø Modify List - Connection Type
Modify List – Connection Type: Accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Connection’ .
Connection: Enter your Riser Connection information. Data is Alphanumeric i.e: MR6E, HMF.

151 161
Ø Modify List - Departments
Modify List – Departments: Accessed by clicking on the underlined title ‘Rig Departments’.
Departments: Default list available upon set up of GRS. For additional Departments, enter your title.
‘Delete line’ button and record will delete
Ø Modify List - Identified by/Regulatory Authority List
Modify List – Identified by/Regulatory Authority List: Accessed by clicking on the underlined title ‘Identified By’ or ‘Regulatory Authority’ on the
FOCUS proposal/report.
Name: For additional entries, enter your name.
Authority: If the name of the individual or company is an Authority (Governmental of Industry), tick the check box.
‘Delete line’ button and record will delete
Ø Modify List - Products
Modify List-Products: Default list available upon set up of GRS. For additional products enter your title in the white boxes below the default list.
Delete Item: Click the cursor on the line you wish to delete then, click delete line button on far left of screen, line will delete. (Note: If the line is blue it
cannot be deleted).
Ø Modify List - Company
Modify List – Company: Accessed by clicking on the underlined title ‘Company’.

Company: For additional Companies, enter your title.
Delete Line: click the cursor on the line you wish to delete then, click delete line button on far left of screen, line will delete. (Note: If the line is blue it
cannot be deleted).

152 161
Ø Modify List - Operator
Modify-List- Operator: Accessed by clicking on the underlined title ‘Operator’.

Operator: For additional Operators, enter your title.
Delete Item: Click the cursor on the line you wish to delete then, click a small (>) will appear on the Left-hand side, click the delete line button on far
left of screen, line will delete.
Ø Modify List - Contract Type
Modify List- Contract Type: Accessed by clicking on the underlined title ‘Contract Type’.
Contract Type: Default list available upon set up of GRS. For additional Contract types, enter your title.
Ø Modify List- Type of Work
Modify List- Type of Work: Accessed by clicking on the underlined title ‘Type of Work’.
Type of Work: Default list available upon set up of GRS. For additional Work types, enter your title.
Ø Modify List - County
Modify List- County: Accessed by clicking on the underlined title ‘County’.

County: For additional Counties, enter your title.

153 161
Ø Modify List - Formation
Modify List- Formation: Accessed by clicking on the underlined title ‘Formation’.

Formation: For additional Formations, enter your title.
Ø Modify List - Main/Sub Lithology
Modify List- Main/Sub Lithology: Accessed by clicking on the underlined title ‘Main Lithology’ or ‘Sub Lithology’.
Main/Sub Lithology: For additional Lithology, enter your title.
Ø Modify List - Section Name
Modify List- Section Name: Accessed by clicking on the underlined title ‘Section Name’.
Section Name: Define the name for the section. Suggestions as follows:
• 36" Section: (36 X 30 Section)
• 26" Section: (26 X 20 Section) or (26 X 18? Section)
• 24" Section: (24 X 20 Section) or (24 X 18? Section)
• 17½" Section: (17½ X 13 3/8 Section)
• 16" Section: (16 x 13 3/8" Section)
• 12½" Section: (12½ X 10¾ Section) or (12½ X 9? Section)
• 12¼" Section: (12¼ X 10¾ Section) or (12¼ X 9? Section)
• 9½" Section: (9½ X 7 Section) or (9½ X 6? Section)
• 8½" Section: (8½ X 7 Section) or (8½ X 6? Section)
• 6½" Section
• 6" Section
Delete Item: by place cursor on the line of the Thread, click a small (>) will appear on the Left-hand side, click the delete line button on far left of
screen, line will delete.

154 161
Ø Modify List - Tubular Equipment
Modify List- Tubular Equipment: Accessed by clicking on the underlined title ‘Equipment’ in the Tubular Inventory.
Tubular Equipment: Define the name for the Equipment.

Abrev: Define the abbreviated name for the equipment. This abbreviation will appear in the IADC report under the BHA section.
Connection Configuration: Allows the items connection configuration to be specified. Defines the layout of connection in the Tubular Inventory and
the BHA Report.
Pin/Box: Pin down – Box up
Box/Pin: Box down – Pin up
One Pin Only: Pin only – up or down
One Box Only: Box only – up or down
Internal Diameter Required: Defines whether an ID measurement is required or not. Bit and MWD equipment are examples where ID is not
required.
Weight Measurement: Defines how weight of the equipment is specified.
Total Weight: Equipment item is a single weight value.
Wt per Length: Equipment item weight is a dependent on the total length of the item entered in the Tubular Inventory.
Delete Item: by place cursor on the line of the Thread, click a small (>) will appear on the Left-hand side, click the delete line button on far left of
screen, line will delete.

155 161
Ø Casing Catalogue
Casing Catalogue in which you enter you Casing information in the appropriate column. For additional casing tubular measurements enter as
follows:
OD: Enter the nominal Outside Diameter. Enter Decimal Units only (3.00), not fractions (6 ½).
ID: Enter the Internal Diameter. Enter Decimal Units only (3.00), not fractions (6 ½).
Wt/per length: Enter the Nominal wt. Enter Decimal Units only (3.00), not fractions (6 ½).
Grade: Enter the Grade information.
Delete Line click the cursor on the line you wish to delete then, click delete line button on far left of screen, line will delete.
Ø Modify List - Make
Modify List – Make: Accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Make’.
Make: For additional casing manufacturers, enter the make information.
Ø Modify List - Pins
Modify List – Pins/Thread: Accessed by clicking on the blue and underlined column title ‘Pins’ .or ‘Thread’
Pins: Default list available upon set up of GRS. For additional threads, enter you Thread information. Enter the data you can use fractions in this
table i.e: 6 5/8" Reg.

156 161
Index
13. Index
A IADC 49
Accounts 10 Crew Assignment Definition 42
Administration 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36 Criteria Search 146
Agreement Process Screen 60 Customize Units 29
Agreements 143 D
Table 143 Daily Executive Summary 114
Agreements Categories 144 Daily Operation Report 108
Agreements Log 59 Daily Operation Report II 110
Agreements Outputs 143, 144 Daily Reports 88
B Data Exchange 24, 25, 27, 28
Backup Data 36 Database 15
BHA Log 134 Connecting 15
BHA Report 133 Database Connection 33
Bit Data Record 129 Database Structure 10
Bit Log 128 Delete Data 33, 34, 35
Bit Record 128 Department Activity 136
BOP 48, 105 Department Activity Report 95
Bulk Section 94 Department Configuration 49
C Departmental Activity 135
Casing 102 Departmental Activity Consolidation 136
Casing Catalogue 156 Departments 152
Client Installation 14 Diverter 48
Closing 29, 80 Down Time Summary 84
OER s 80 Downtime Criteria Search 149
Well 29 Drill Collars 46, 73
Codes 43 Drill Pipe 71
Communicate 65 Drill Pipe/HW Drill Pipe 46
Plan 65 Drill Report 68
Compact 20 Drill Report Screen 67
Company 152 Drill Report Screen Log 67
Company Info 50 Dual 81
Compliance Requirement 52 OER 81
Conceptual Outline 8 Dynamic Positioning Event Report 75
Configuration Report 147 Dynamic Positioning Event Report Log 74
Configuration Screen 36 Dynamic Positioning Monthly Report 74
Configuring Your Email Client 13 Dynamic Positioning Monthly Report Log 74
Connecting 15 E
Database 15 Edit Operations 142
Connection Type 151 Emergency Evacuation Report 92
Contract Type 153 Enterprise 126
County 153 Equipment Configuration 44
Create New Operational Event Report 77 Event Reports 126
Create New Well 97 Excellence Graph 143
Creating 18 Export 27
Rig 18 Well 27
Creation 106 Export Reports via E Mail 19
Report 106 Express 126
Crew 49

157 161
Index
F Introduction 22
Flow 24 GRS-Rig v4.0 22
Information 24 J
FOCUS 64, 65, 66, 67 Joints 48
FOCUS Configuration Report 147 Joints Characteristics 105
FOCUS General Instructions 62 Joints Measurement 48
FOCUS Print Report 67 K
FOCUS Report 63 Keyword Search 135
FOCUS Report Log 62 L
FOCUS Status 145, 146 Last Casing 116
Formation 154 Lifeboat Muster List 92
Formulate 64 Local Configuration 10
Plan 64 Log 69
G Incidents 69
General Configuration 10 Incidents Report 69
Grades 151 looks like 17
GRS-Rig 8, 9 M
GRS-Rig Software 12 Main Codes 120
GRS-Rig v4.0 22 Main Operations 117
Introduction 22 Main/Sub Lithology 154
GRS-Support 21 Make 156
H Manhour Month Report 53
Hourly Payroll 90 Manhour Summary Report 54
Hours 86 Marine Manning Certification 52
Running 86 Marine Manning Status Report 56
HSE Meeting Report Screen 69 Marine Report 93
HSE Meeting Report Screen Log 68 Minimum Well Information 98
HWDP 71 Modify List 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156
I Monthly Analysis 145
IADC 49, 112 Open Report 145
Crew 49 Mud Pump Definition 45
IADC Page 112, 113 Mud Report 111
Identified by/Regulatory Authority List 152 Multi-Activity 38
Import 28 Muster Lists 91
Well 28 N
Import Base Information 27 New Day 108
Import Company Data 28 New Rig Rate Report Screen 85
Important Release Notes 8, 21 New Weekly Drill Report 85
Incident Report IADC Values 58 New Well 97
Incident Report Log 57 New_Installation_of_v4.0 21
Incident Report Processing Flowchart 59 NPT Summary Report 84
Incident Report Screen 57 O
Incidents 69 Obsolete Reports 35
Log 69 OER 81
Incidents Report 69 Dual 81
Log 69 OER Event Examples 81
Information 24 OER Reporting Procedure 78
Flow 24 OER s 80
Installation 13 Closing 80
Installation Folder 14 Rig Manager Review 80

158 161
Index
Of Well Report 148 Reminder 8
Open Report 145 Repair 20
Monthly Analysis 145 Reporting 11, 106
Operational 29, 30 Creation 106
Operational Classification 30 Reset Swivel Packing 116
Operational Codes 119, 126 Response Team Muster List 92
Operational Event Report 79 Results 67
Operational Event Report Process 83 Summarize 67
Operations 149 Revise Validated Reports 31
Operations Breakdown 117 Rig 18
Operations Event Log 77 Creating 18
Operations Event Report 76 Rig Creation 30
Operator 153 Rig Identification 37
Organize Resources 64 Rig Location 27
Other Days 96 RIG Location 25
P Rig Manager 32
Parallel Activity Operations 81 Rig Manager Review 80
Performance Tracking 137, 140, 141, 142 OER s 80
Personnel Arrived 88 Rig Move Information 102
Personnel Data 50, 51 Rig Move Report 103
Personnel Departed 89 Rig Rate Report 85
Personnel Info 51 Rig Rate Report Log 84
Personnel On Board 89 Riser 73
Personnel Reports 55 Riser Catalogue 151
Pins 156 Riser Joints 46, 47
Pipe Tally 130 Riser Running 104, 105, 106
Pipe Tally Configuration 130 Risers 46, 47
Pipe Tally Report 131 Rooms Database 40
Plan 64, 65 Running 86
Communicate 65 Hours 86
Formulate 64 S
POB Database 50 SCR Record 115
POB Report 88 Search For Policy 136
POB Summary 91 Secondary Codes 123
practices 8 Section 102
Primary Codes 121 Section Name 154
Print Reports 19 Sections Information 101
Procedure Feedback 136 Send Daily Data 25
Product Inventory 127 Send Data 36
Productive/Non Productive Time 144 Server Installation 14
Products 152 Settings Users Accounts 18
Products Database 87 Setup 137
Program 9 Sidetrack 98
Pulling Report 105, 106 Software 15
Pulling Report Log 104 Starting 15
Pump Data Record 127 SQA Log 60
Pup Joints 47 SQA Report 61
R SQA Report Screen 60
Rate summary 84 START Card Report Log 61
Rates 43 START Card Report Screen 61

159 161
Index
START Cards Statistics 145 Unsent Reports 34
Starting 12, 15 Upgrading 21
Software 15 v4.0 21
Summarize 67 User Accounts 32
Results 67 User Manual Introduction 8
Support Operations 118 Users 10
T V
Table 143 v4.0 21
Agreements 143 Upgrading 21
Tabular Report 141 W
Tight Hole 99 Weekly Drill Report 86
Time / Depth Curve 148 Weekly Drill Report Log 85
Tour Configuration 39 Weekly Executive Summary 107, 114
TRIR-Total Record Incident Rate 49 Well 27, 28, 29, 33
Trouble Shooting 20 Close 29
Tubular Description 45 Export 27
Tubular Equipment 155 Import 28
Tubular Inventory 70 Well Breakdown 149
Tubular Inventory Catalogue 151 Well Control Certification 52
Tubular Riser Report 71 Well Control Training Status Report 56
Tubular Riser Report Log 71 Well Days 108
Tubular Riser Report Screen 71, 73 Well Information Screen 100
Tubulars 86 Well Lithology 101
Tubulars Description 46 Well Reports 148, 149
Type 153 Well Run 128
Work 153 Work 153
U Type 153
Undertake the Plan Tab 66 X
Unlock User 33 X-Over 47

160 161

Global Reporting System User Manual GRS-Rig V4.0: Title

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Global Reporting System User Manual GRS-Rig V4.0: Title

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Title:

GLOBAL REPORTING SYSTEM

Rev. Effective Description of Change Prepared Reviewed

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

This publication was produced by:

Ø Important Release Notes: Reminder on good practices

Ø GRS-Rig: Conceptual Outline

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø GRS-Rig: About the Program

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø Users and Accounts

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

The Administrator Profile: (Rig Admin or Base Admin)

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

• Departmental Activity Reports: Departmental Heads, Drilling Dept, Warehouse

Ø Starting with GRS-Rig Software

Requirements: GRS-Rig is designed to run on the minimum configuration as follows:

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø Configuring Your Email Client

Internet Options settings

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Run the GRS-Rig Setup program from the CD-ROM.

Run the GRS-Rig Setup program from the CD-ROM.

Ø The Installation Folder

Shortcuts: Shortcuts for GRS-Rig application are created both in:

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø Starting the Software

Ø Connecting to the Database

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø What it looks like

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø Creating the Rig(s)

Log in using the default administrator account.

Ø Settings Users Accounts

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø Export Reports via E Mail

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø Compact and Repair

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø Important Release Note: Upgrading to v4.0

IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU FOLLOW THE STEPS INDICATED BELOW

AFTER HAVING SENT THE NEXT DAILY DATA FILE:

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø Data Exchange: Flow of Information

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø Data Exchange: Send Daily Data (RIG Location)

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Cancel: Cancels ‘Send Daily Data’ Routine.

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø Data Exchange: Import Base Information (Rig Location)

Ø Data Exchange: Export a Well

GRS v4.0 User Manual Transocean IPS - WTA Page Of

Ø Data Exchange: Import a Well

For example: GRS-Well_Devnick_(66_1_14-May-2001)_01-Nov-2001_11-07.zip (Rig: Paul B Lloyd)